ACTIVE INDEX PHD TECHNICAL DATA BULLETINS INDEX ISSUE DATE:

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "ACTIVE INDEX PHD TECHNICAL DATA BULLETINS INDEX ISSUE DATE:"

Transcription

1 ACTIVE INDEX PHD TECHNICAL DATA BULLETINS INDEX ISSUE DATE: BULLETIN NO. DESCRIPTION OF BULLETIN BULLETIN DATE CYLINDERS: C1...Revised Seal Material and Life Rating C16...Discontinuing Series CMx Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinders ROTARY ACTUATORS: R7...Series RI Dimension Corrections R8...Rotary Actuator Shock Absorber Upgrade R9...Series RA Shock Absorber Dimension and Load Changes R10...Series RFS Application Unit Orientation Recommendation/Warning MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS: M...Discontinuing Series MCS Multi-Motion Actuators SLIDES: SL2...Design Change to Series SGxM Slides SL...Revised SHP Slide Selection Data SL4...Design Change to the Series SG Slide SL...Series SM Slide Accessories Page Missing from CAT SL6...Shock Absorber Availability on Classic Slides SL7...Design Change to Metric Series SG Slides (9) SL8...Discontinuing Series SJP Slides GRIPPERS: G14...Part Ejector/Spring Assist Added to Series GRTx G1...Design Change to Series GRB G16...Series GRB Gripper Corrected Engineering Data G17...New Switch Kit Numbers for Series GRS/GRF Grippers G18...Higher Grip Forces for GRK Grippers G19...New -STT99 Coupled Jaw Position Sensor Option G20...Discontinuing Series 8400 Parallel Grippers G21...Discontinuing Series EGP Electromechanical Grippers SWITCHES AND SENSORS: SW xx Cordsets SW19...Incorrect Wiring Schematic Label SW20...Metal Proximity Switch Mounting Brackets For Use With Series 170 Switches SW21...Legacy Switches and Cordsets SW22...Legacy Large Bore Switch Brackets SW2...Phase Out of Amp Reed Switch SW24...Environmental Protection JC1STP Switch SW2...Discontinuing Series 142 Switch Brackets SW26...Discontinuing Series 161-xxx 12 mm Threaded DC Inductive Proximity Switch COMMON/UNIVERSAL: C/U1...Seal Specification Change C/U16...Hydraulic Pressure Rating Change on Series 000 & 6000 Multi-Motion & Rotary Actuators C/U17...Catalog 200 Updates PPC: PPC1...Fixed Orifice for Series BCZ Nozzle Cylinders PPC2...Preform Eject Slide Valve Connector Rewiring PPC...Rod Bushing Movement PPC4...Design Change on BCZ Nozzle Cylinders PPC...Rod Seal Leakage - Alps Leak Test Cylinder PPC6...Design 7 Change on BCZ Nozzle Cylinders PPC7...BCS2 and BCS26 Check Valve Failure PPC8...Maintenance Instructions for Series1 Blow Nozzle Cylinders PPC9...New Option -X26 Replaces Old Option -X PPC10...New Molded Yellow Seal on -X27 Replaces Old Seal PPC11...Discontinuing Series FCA Filler Cylinder PPC12...BST2x2- Cam Bearing Wheel Replacement PPC1...Discontinuing Design 7 of BCZ2 Sidel Series2 Nozzle Cylinders and Kits PPC14...New Options for Design 8 of BCZ2 Sidel Series2 Nozzle Cylinders and Kits PPC1...New Option -Y1 for Design 8 of BCZ2 Sidel Series2 Nozzle Cylinders and Kits CLAMPS: CL1...Series PLM Switch Cable Connection Direction CL2...New Series PLK Design Replaces Design 1 and PHD PLUS : PHDP1..Series ECV, ESK/ESL, ESG Engineering Data, Life Charts, and Equations PHD Optimax : OPT1...Series OCG Cylinder Switch Bracket Change Note: Titles shown in bold type are the newest Technical Data Bulletins.

2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: HV, /4", 1", 1-1/8" SAE ports are now available on /4" 1", and 1-1/8" bore Tom Thumb 'HV' Series Cylinders as a standard option. The new option letter is -Y. In order to incorporate an SAE port, it was necessary to utilize a brazed-on adaptor on the head and cap. The drawing below shows the adaptor dimensions and port size. 4 7/16-20 S.A.E. PORT THREAD 2 PLACES 1.62 DIA The SAE port option -Y has the following limitations: Not available on cylinders with 'F' mounting style. Not available with Port Position on a unit with 'B' mounting style. Not available on a /4" bore with either 'T' or 'L' mount with oversized rod. Catalog '91 contains this option. Price adder for SAE ports on /4", 1", 1-1/8" bore 'HV' Cylinders is $2.00 SAE ports are available on other PHD products. Consult the factory for specific sizes and pricing. As the demand increases for SAE ports, make sure your customers are aware of PHD's continuing effort to supply cylinders and actuators with SAE ports to meet their requirements. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

3 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C2 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: A, AV, HV (MEDIUM DUTY) The inside diameters of cushion blocks will be opened up to eliminate the possibility of interference between the spud diameter and the thru hole of the cushion block. You may have noticed this if a large load was put on the rod and then cycled with cushions, a clanking noise may be heard or a shake of the rod may be seen, usually on the cap end. The drawings for all blocks have been changed and any new blocks will be changed. Estimated time of complete changeover will be in July of PISTON CUSHION "SPUD" If any of your customers have experienced the above mentioned problem, make them aware of the improved design. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

4 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: A, AV An improved cushion design is now being used on the /4", 1", and 1-1/8" bore Series A and AV Cylinders. The improvements include: Elimination of the traditional ball check with the checking device built into the cushion needle. (See illustration) NEEDLE CHECK SEAL FREE FLOW THROUGH CENTER HOLE AND CROSS DRILLED ORIFICE The thread on the adjusting needle has been changed from 40 to 72 threads per inch. The shape of the needle has been redesigned. The result is a much more consistent and reliable cushion which now has an adjustment range at minimum 2 times greater than our original cushion. There is no additional charge for this new and improved design. All units shipped after May 1, 1991 will contain this new design. All Repair Kits will come with parts to rebuild both the old style and new design cushions. An instruction card will indicate which parts the customer should use to rebuild his specific unit. Inform your customers of this new design and use the above information to sell them on the benefits. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

5 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C4 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS MODEL OR SERIES: TOM THUMB MEDIUM AND HEAVY DUTY CYLINDERS Two Wrench Flats on -I Female Rod End Catalog 91 indicates that all PHD Cylinder rod ends are manufactured with four wrench flats. We have found that this design does not work well with the -I style four female rod end due to material thickness and rod strength. For this reason all cylinders with the -I option will have only two wrench flats. This change will be reflected in future catalogs. -I FEMALE ROD END ALL OTHER CYLINDER ROD ENDS TWO WRENCH FLATS FOUR WRENCH FLATS None required. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

6 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS MODEL OR SERIES: COMPACT OVAL Compact Oval Rod Material Change Starting August 1, 199, the standard rod material for all Compact Oval Cylinders will be 0 stainless steel in place of the original chrome plated steel rod material. This change provides a corrosion resistant shaft on this aluminum bodied cylinder. After August 1, customers requiring the original chrome plated steel must specify Option -R2. Compact Oval Cylinder Stainless Steel Rod Effective August 1, 199 Inform all your Compact Oval Cylinder customers of this material change. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

7 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C6 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS MODEL OR SERIES: COMPACT OVAL Compact Oval Rod Material Until further notice, compact oval rod material will remain chrome plated steel. This Technical Bulletin supersedes Bulletin C dated PHD will continue testing to evaluate the best materials and processes to provide our customers with the highest value in cylinders and actuators. None FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

8 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C7 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: A, AV F Mount Bracket Used With Stroke Adjustment Tom Thumb /4", 1", and 1-1/8" bore A & AV Series Cylinders are now available with F (MS8) mounting and stroke adjustment as a standard product. In the past, these were handled as a custom product, because of the interference between the stroke adjustment screw and the traditional mounting hole or F Tab on the cap. The standard configuration will now incorporate an F Bracket, which is now being used on double rod end cylinders with F (MS8) mounting. Unless otherwise specified, this will be the standard configuration anytime an F Mount is specified with stroke adjustment (-A). STROKE ADJUSTMENT SCREW F MOUNTING BRACKET FROM DOUBLE ROD END CYLINDER None FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

9 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C8 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDER ROD COUPLERS MODEL OR SERIES: ROD COUPLERS Cylinder Rod Coupler Conversion PHD no longer offers the series Rod Couplers. Listed below is a cross reference to assist in converting these couplers to other PHD Rod Couplers or to TRD brand couplers: DISCONTINUED AVAILABLE THD SIZE PHD PN# STD PHD PT# TRD PN# 1/ * AC-20 / * AC-12 / * AC-7 / AC-7-C 7/ * AC-47 1/ * AC-00 1/ AC-00-C / * AC-62 / * AC-70 / AC-70-C 7/ AC AC AC-1000-C 1-1/ AC / AC / AC / AC-120 *These PHD Couplers contain the same thread size but are not dimensionally interchangeable. See Page 2 of this Technical Data Bulletin for a dimensional comparison. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

10 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C8 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDER ROD COUPLERS PAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: ROD COUPLERS Dimensional Comparison Series Couplers (Discontinued) A INTERNAL THREAD x E DEEP F DIA B D G C A THREAD.02 LATERAL COMPENSATION C L 1 ANGULAR COMPENSATION MODEL NO A 1/4-28 /16-24 /8-24 7/ /2-20 /8-18 /4-16 LETTER DIMENSION B C D E F G Standard PHD Couplers (Still Available) A INTERNAL THREAD x E DEEP F DIA B D G C A THREAD.02 LATERAL COMPENSATION C L 2 ANGULAR COMPENSATION MODEL NO A 1/4-28 /16-24 /8-24 7/ /2-20 /8-18 /4-16 B LETTER DIMENSION C D E F G Shaded dimensions indicate dimensional differences between models. Use this information to convert Series Couplers to other coupler models. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

11 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C9 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS MODEL OR SERIES: AV,HV,A NEW SPRING RETURN SPRING RATES ON MEDIUM DUTY CYLINDERS The published spring rates for option "SR" Spring Return and option "SC" Spring Extend have changed to more truly reflect the performance characteristics of the cylinders. The spring rates for 0"-" stroke range remain unchanged at a 4 lb. preload and a 7 lb./in. spring rate. Cylinders with a 1/4" -6" stroke range now have a cataloged 2 lb. preload and a 1/2 lb./in. spring rate. This change will be reflected in PHD's new catalog 96. STROKE 0" - " 1/4" - 6" SPRING RATES PRELOAD 4 lbs. 2 lbs. RATE 7 lbs./in. 1/2 lbs./in. NONE. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

12 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C10 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS MODEL OR SERIES: /4", 1", 1-1/8" AV, HV, A Modifications To Eye Brackets and Clevis Brackets PHD is removing the mounting screw counterbores on all eye brackets and clevis brackets for use on /4", 1", 1-1/8" bore Tom Thumb Medium Duty Cylinders. This change will have NO effect on the mounting dimensions, required hardware, or mounting attachment performance. The mounting flange portion of these attachments has been redesigned and narrowed by the depth of the previous counterbores. This change is being made to improve the quality and appearance of these mounting attachments. These modified parts will be phased in as existing inventory runs out. EYE BRACKET CD DIA. THRU.70 DIA. THRU HOLE FOR DD SHCS 4 PLACES AB E SQ. SQ. BORE SIZE /4 1 & 1-1/8 CYL SERIES A,AV,HV A AV,HV PART NO AB LETTER DIMENSION CB CD DD # # #10 E CB CLEVIS BRACKET - PIN INCLUDED.60 CD DIA. THRU CC DIA THRU HOLE FOR DD SHCS 4 PLACES AB E SQ. SQ. BORE SIZE CYL SERIES /4 A,AV,HV 1 & A 1-1/8 AV,HV KIT NO LETTER DIMENSION AB CB CC CD CD1 DD E FL L # # # FL L CD1 CB None. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

13 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C11 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS MODEL OR SERIES: HV (Hydraulic -position) Proper Valving Critical PHD has identified a potential problem concerning improper valving of Series HV Cylinders in the field. If not valved properly, extreme pressure intensification can occur in cylinder #1. Pressures of 000 psi can be created causing catastrophic cylinder failure. PHD has added a caution statement in Catalog 96 and will be including a product packer addressing this issue on future orders. 1) Rear port being pressurized. 2) Center port must be open to tank. If blocked, cylinder #1 becomes an intensifier. OIL OIL CYLINDER #1 CYLINDER #2 Inform customers as necessary. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

14 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C12 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: RODLESS CYLINDERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES CE Series CE Kinetic Energy Revisions Following is revised data concerning the shock absorber specification chart found on page 1 of catalog CE01 and kinetic energy graphs on page 14. In both cases, the changes affect only the 2 and 2 mm bore size units. Highlighted (shaded) areas denote changes. BORE [mm] PHD SHOCK ABSORBER KIT NUMBER* xx xx xx SHOCK ABSORBER SPECIFICATION CHART S STROKE in mm THREAD TYPE M20 x 1. M2 x 1. M2 x 1. SHOCK ABSORBER WEIGHT lb kg *For 2 & 2 mm bore units, see Graph 1 on page 16; for 40 & 0 mm, see Graph 2; for 6 & 80 mm, see Graph ET TOTAL ENERGY/CYCLE in-lb Nm ETC TOTAL ENERGY/HOUR in-lb Nm FD PROPELLING FORCE lb N MAXIMUM KINETIC ENERGY GRAPHS VELOCITY ft/sec [m/sec] 2. [.76] 2.0 [.61] 1. [.46] 1.0 [.0]. [.1] 2 mm 2 mm VELOCITY ft/sec [m/sec].0 [.91] 2. [.76] 2.0 [.61] 1. [.46] 1.0 [.0]. [.1] [4.4] 20 [9.07] 0 [1.61] 40 [18.14] EFFECTIVE MOVING WEIGHT lb [kg] 0 [22.68] 60 [27.22] [4.4] 20 [9.07] [1.61] [18.14] [22.68] [27.22] [1.7] [6.29] [40.82] [4.6] EFFECTIVE MOVING WEIGHT lb [kg] Inform customers who are users of the affected models. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

15 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C1 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES CT CT Cylinder Fastener Kit Modification Due to PHD s supplier ceasing production, effective 8/4/97 PHD has changed the length of the fastener which secures the tool plate to the piston rod on Series CTS and CTD 0 and 6 mm bore compact cylinders. To accommodate the longer fastener, the piston rod tap drill depths have been modified to a deeper thread. A new fastener kit no. (see below) has been created and should be ordered for units built after 8/4/97. Inventory of the old fastener kits will remain available and must be ordered for units built prior to 8/4/97. CHART 1 - CTS CYLINDER (SINGLE ROD) QTY PART DESCRIPTION 1* Seal Kit, All 1* Repair Kit Std -BB 1 Fastener Kit 12 mm 16 mm 20 mm 2 mm 2 mm 40 mm 0 mm 6 mm x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x New kit # for units built after 8/4/ CHART 2 - CTD CYLINDER (DOUBLE ROD) QTY PART DESCRIPTION 1* Seal Kit, All 1* Repair Kit Std -BB 1 Fastener Kit 12 mm 16 mm 20 mm 2 mm 2 mm 40 mm 0 mm 6 mm x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x New kit # for units built after 8/4/ Fastener screw has been changed from a M10 x 1. x 16 mm to a M10 x 1. x 20 mm on all 0 and 6 mm bore units built after 8/4/97. Make sure fastener kits ordered are correct dependent on date the cylinder was manufactured. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

16 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C14 DATE: 7/10/98 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES CV RODLOK TM Holding Force The static locking force shown on page 9 of catalog CV01 (ISO Cylinders) for the 80 mm bore size has been revised. The correct force is indicated below in the outlined area of the table. BORE [mm] STATIC LOCKING FORCE lb [N] Note this correction in your catalog and inform potential uses of the 80 mm size Rodlok option. FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

17 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C1 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS MODEL OR SERIES: CRS REVISED SEAL MATERIAL AND LIFE RATING The following information has been revised in Catalog 200 in regards to the New Generation Series CRS Cylinder design: 1. PHD has upgraded the piston seal material used on the New Generation Series CRS Cylinder to a self lubricating nitrile compound. Below is the revised cutaway graphic, which replaces the one on page 1- of Catalog 200. The shaded area reflects the seal material change. compact design is ideal for applications requiring power in a small package optional shock pads add no length to cylinder, extend cylinder life, and minimize noise at end of piston travel thru and threaded holes for easy cylinder mounting clear anodized extruded body enables flush mounting of Series 6790 Switches on up to three sides of cylinder stainless steel bore plug self-lubricating nitrile piston seal provides long life and supports piston to help reduce rod free play hard chrome-plated steel piston rod provides maximum wear resistance for long life aluminum bushings with PTFE filled hardcoat provide maximum wear resistance for long life 2. As a result of enhanced seal material and confirmed unit life testing for the New Generation Series CRS Cylinder, PHD has increased the cylinder's published life rating to 70 million linear inches of travel. Below is the revised specification chart, which replaces the one on page 1- of Catalog 200. The shaded area shows changes from the old specification. SPECIFICATIONS OPERATING PRESSURE STROKE TOLERANCE TEMPERATURE LIMITS VELOCITY LIFE EXPECTANCY LUBRICATION MAINTENANCE Inform your customers of these changes and the superior life rating. SERIES CRS 10 psi min to 10 psi max at zero load [0.7 bar min to 10 bar max] air ± 0.01 inch [± 0.8 mm] -20 to F [-28 to + 82 C] 20 in/sec [. m/sec] typical min, zero load at 100 psi [7 bar] 70 million linear inches [1.77 million linear meters] minimum at operating temperatures under 120 F [49 C] (-V1 & -Z1 options may reduce life) Pre-lubricated for use with non-lubricated or lubricated air Field repairable FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

18 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: E1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: ESCAPEMENT PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES Z The fastener (item 7) securing the piston and rod has been changed. Originally, a special button head was used. It has been replaced with a stainless steel socket head cap screw. This change reduced costs and improved fatigue life. It became effective ROD WITH SWITCH MAGNET None. FILE UNDER ESCAPEMENTS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

19 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: E2 PRODUCT TYPE: ESCAPEMENTS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES Z, WITH STROKE ADJUSTMENT New Stroke Adjustment Seal Series Z Escapements have a new stroke adjustment seal design effective October 1, The new design incorporates a sealing washer instead of the seal as part of the jam nut. This change allows PHD to reduce cost on a rather expensive part of the Escapement. Tests indicate there is no reduction in quality or reliability of the unit. New design effective Old Design None required. FILE UNDER ESCAPEMENTS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

20 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: E PRODUCT TYPE: ESCAPEMENTS MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SERIES Z ESCAPEMENTS Updated Port Control Design and Revised Standard Seals The Series Z Escapement is the first of many PHD products to be updated to incorporate a new type of check seal as part of the PHD Port Control. The check seal is part of the port control needle assembly, eliminating the need for a separate ball check. This same check seal has been used successfully on many PHD products with cushions. This new design provides a more reliable check function for more consistent speed control performance. Also, all the standard seals throughout the unit will be Buna-N in place of Viton. NEEDLE CHECK SEAL FREE FLOW THROUGH CENTER HOLE AND CROSS DRILLED ORIFICE This new Port Control design and Buna-N seal change will be phased in as the current design parts are used up. Estimated date for phase-in of units with all Buna-N seals and the new Port Control needle is November 1. None required. FILE UNDER ESCAPEMENTS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

21 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: E4 PRODUCT TYPE: ESCAPEMENTS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES Z Revised Standard Seal Compound The purpose of this Technical Data Bulletin is to clarify the seal compound change discussed on bulletin E. Starting January 1, 199 all Series Z Escapement orders will automatically be converted to Buna-N seals in place of the previously standard Viton seals. All orders should be placed with the last digit (seal compound) specified as -1. These units are pneumatic only and are not recommended for use in temperatures beyond 180 F. The elimination of the Viton seals will not effect the performance of the units within this maximum temperature rating. TO ORDER SPECIFY: Model, Design No., and Options. DESIGN NO. CAP OPTIONS 0 - Standard Cap 1 - Cap with flow controls and stroke adjustment 2 - Cap with stroke adjustment only MODEL OPTIONS OPTIONS SEALS /2" Bore 0-None 0-None 1 - Buna-N 1/2" Stroke /4" Bore /4" Stroke Change all new Escapement orders to -1 Buna-N seals. If Viton is required it must be specified in writing. Port Control check seal is not available in Viton. FILE UNDER ESCAPEMENTS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

22 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: E DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: ESCAPEMENTS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES 160 (SERIES Z) DESIGN NUMBER CHANGE ON SERIES 160 ESCAPEMENTS Due to some internal changes to PHD's Series 160 (Series Z) Escapements, the design number is being changed from design 1 to design 2. These changes will be transparent to our customers and distributors, but we wanted to identify these modifications with the design number change. The design 2 units will start shipping in mid-december '9 as our inventory on design 1 parts runs out. PHD will automatically convert design 1 orders to the new design 2 units. PHD's complete Catalog 96 as well as a new Escapement addendum will carry the design 2 designation. TO ORDER SPECIFY: Series, Model, Design No., Rod End Option, Cap Option, Switch Ready Option, and Seals. SERIES DESIGN NO. CAP OPTIONS 0 - Standard Cap 1 - Cap with flow controls and stroke adjustment 2 - Cap with stroke adjustment only SEALS 1 - Buna-N 2 - Viton (Not offered with cap options 2 & ) IMPERIAL 10-1/2" Bore & Stroke with slotted mounting hole 20 - /4" Bore & Stroke with slotted mounting hole MODEL METRIC mm Bore & Stroke with slotted mounting hole mm Bore & Stroke with slotted mounting hole ROD END OPTIONS 0 - Flats and threaded holes on all four sides with a threaded hole in the end on both rods. SWITCH READY OPTIONS 0 - None 1 - Series 60 Hall Effect Switch Ready (Switch must be ordered separately.) None. FILE UNDER ESCAPEMENTS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

23 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R2 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 01800, 01807, 0187 Poor adhesion of loctite between the ball bearing and teflon hard coated aluminum body has prompted the following change: Bearing diameters will be masked so that no teflon hard coat material will be allowed to adhere to the aluminum. The only visible difference will be an unfinished bare aluminum area on the bearing diameter between the face of the body and the snap ring. UNCOATED If the actuator is exposed to an environment that may attack unfinished aluminum, a special unit may be required. FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

24 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: & MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS Hydraulic Miniature Rotary Actuators Eliminated PHD is no longer recommending our Miniature Rotary Actuators ( and ) for hydraulic service. These are currently rated at 00 psi hydraulic service in Catalog 91. We have found the standard seals are not suitable for proper sealing of Hydraulic fluids. The volume of units sold for hydraulic service has been very low. We recommend that customers requiring a hydraulic Miniature Rotary Actuator move up to a Series 1000 to ensure proper performance and satisfaction. This change will be reflected in future catalogs. Convert requests for Miniature Rotary Actuators for hydraulic service to Series 1000 units. FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

25 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R4 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES Improved Preloaded Keyway (-K) Shaft Option A change has been made to the preloaded keyway pinion shaft option for all Series Rotary Actuators. A.00" radius or chamfer has been added to the notch which is used for the preload set screw..00" RADIUS OR CHAMFER This improvement is a result of feedback from some PHD customers who experienced premature failure of pinion shafts with the -K option. This radius adds strength to the shaft and brings more durability to the -K option. These improved preloaded keyways will be phased in as inventory permits. All units with -K option shipped after March 1, 1994 should include this improved design. NOTE: The supplied preload screw will also have a matched chamfer added to it to accommodate the radius. Inform any customers who may have experienced -K option shaft failures of this product improvement. FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

26 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: 2, 4, 6, 8000 Four Position Units Revised Four Position Backlash Tolerance The backlash at end of rotation on a 2, 4, 6, or 8000 four position Rotary Actuator is more than 1 degree. Catalog 9 (page -24) indicates that double rack actuators have zero backlash at ends of rotation when used with angle adjustments. While this is true of standard two position, three position, and five position units, it is incorrect for four position Rotary Actuators. This correction will be covered in the next major catalog printing. Four Position Unit Make this correction in your current catalog and inform all customers using four position Rotary Actuators FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

27 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R6 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RA Improvement to Output Hub PHD has revised the optional output hub (Q10 and Q19) available on Series RA Rotary Actuators from a double slot to a single slot design. This change increases the overall structural strength of the hub while having no effect dimensionally. The new single slot hubs will be phased in starting approximately 8/26/97 and completed by approximately 12/1/97. Slot eliminated on optional (Q10 & Q19) output hubs on Series RA Rotary Actuators. None FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

28 DATE: PAGE 1 OF TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R7 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RI SERIES RI CORRECTIONS Following are revisions to Catalog 2002 dimensional data regarding the Series RI Rotary Actuator. Data highlighted (shaded) indicates revised information. The effected catalog pages are indicated in the lower right hand corner. PRESSURE OUTPUT HUB O-RING INTERFACE RIxx2 RIxx2 RIxx0 4X K L A Ø A 4X C THD x D DP Ø B A 4X C THD x D DP 6X K L Ø A B Ø B B 4X C THD x D DP Ø A 8X K L C Ø B C 4 6 Ø E 4X Ø F x G DP O-RING INTERFACE Ø J 2X Ø H x R DP Ø E 6X Ø F x G DP O-RING INTERFACE Ø J 2X Ø H x R DP 8X Ø F x G DP O-RING INTERFACE Ø E 2X Ø H x R DP Ø J 4X (G) 6X (G) 8X (G) PRESSURE INPUT PORT INTERFACE RIxx2 RIxx2 RIxx0 4X N CUSTOMER PORT 6X N CUSTOMER PORT 8X N CUSTOMER PORT 4X K L 4 6X K L 4 8X K L Ø M Ø P Ø M Ø P Ø P Ø M UNIT RIS12 & RID12 RIS2 & RID2 RIS12 & RID12 RIS2 & RID2 RIS10 & RID10 RIS0 & RID0 A [0] 2.20 [64.0].10 [80.0] A TOL ±.00 [.1].00 [.1].00 [.1] B 1.78 [.0] [46.0] 2.28 [8.0] METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ]. NOTE: 1) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION. C 10-2 M x 0.8 1/4-28 M6 x 1.0 /16-24 M8 x 1.2 D.472 [12.0].610 [1.].797 [20.2] E.12 [1.0].60 [16.0].906 [2.0] LETTER DIMENSION G H H TOL ± [.7] [.98] [.008] [.7] [7.99] [.008] [1.0] [10.01] [.008] F.177 [4.].197 [.0].276 [7.0] Inform potential customers of the Series RI of these revisions. J.197 [.0].276 [7.0].4 [11.0] K L M 1.7 [40.0] [46.0] 2.62 [60.0] N 10-2 M x 0.8 1/8-27 NPT 1/8-28 BSPP 1/8-27 NPT 1/8-28 BSPP P [7.0] [68.0].10 [80.0] R.197 [.0].1 [8.0].4 [9.0] Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-6 FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

29 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R8 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RI & RA Rotary Actuator Shock Absorber Upgrade Effective September 1, 2004 PHD will implement changes on certain sizes of Series RA and RI Rotary Actuators to upgrade shock absorbers. This change will provide improved stopping capacity and actuator performance. Additionally, the new self-compensating, non-adjustable shock will eliminate the current adjustable type that was tedious to adjust in certain applications. The specific models affected are: RASx2 RISx2 RIDx2 RIDx2 RISx0 UNIT SIZE RISx12 RISx2 RISx12 RISx2 RISx20 RISx60 A.200 [.1].240 [6.1].10 [7.9] LETTER DIMENSION B [72.].26 [82.9].924 [99.7] C.1 [14.0].787 [20.0].984 [2.0] D.770 [19.6] [27.9] 1.60 [4.] METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ]. NOTE: FOR RISxxxx UNITS WITH CUSHION USE RIDxxxx DIMENSION L Below is the upgraded shock absorber specifications and dimensions chart found on page -1 of Catalog 200. This chart supersedes the chart in Catalog 200. Highlighted (shaded) areas show changes from the old specifications chart in Catalog 200. UNIT SIZE RISxx2 RIDxx2 RISxx2 RIDxx2 RISxx0 RIDxx0 SHOCK ABSORBER KIT NO THREAD TYPE mm M14 x 1. M14 x 1. M20 x 1. M20 x 1. M2 x 1. M2 x 1. SHOCK ABSORBER SPECIFICATIONS STROKE SHOCK ABSORBER WEIGHT KINETIC ENERGY LOAD SHOCK ABSORBER LENGTH ACROSS SHOCK FLATS SHOCK ABSORBER EFFECTIVE in mm lb kg in-lb Nm in mm in mm ANGLE SHOCK ABSORBERS KITS INCLUDE: FOR RISxx UNITS - 1 SHOCK AND 1 NUT FOR RIDxx UNITS - 1 SHOCK, 1 NUT, 1 THREAD SEAL, AND 1 SEAL WASHER 1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED In addition, a design number change was required only on the RISx0. This is due to the new shock having a larger diameter. Below is the design number change in the ordering data found on page -42 of Catalog 200. TO ORDER SPECIFY: Product, Series, Type, Design No., Bore Size, Rotation, and Options. PRODUCT R - Rotary S SINGLE RACK D DOUBLE RACK R TYPE BORE Ø 2 mm 2 mm 0 mm 2 mm 2 mm 0 mm I TORQUE AT 87 psi 2 in-lb [.6 Nm] 6 in-lb [7.1 Nm] 207 in-lb [2.4 Nm] 64 in-lb [7.2 Nm ] 127 in-lb [14. Nm] 414 in-lb [46.8 Nm] D HOLLOW PINION H - Hollow Pinion Leave blank if standard BORE Ø 2 mm 2 mm 0 mm MID-POSITION 90 On -position only Must be specified ANGLE ADJUSTMENT AB - Angle adjustment with shock pad installed both ends AC - Angle adjustment with shock pad installed counterclockwise 90 AW - Angle adjustment with shock pad installed clockwise 90 See note 1 H 1 2 x180 x 90 - NB - PB - AB - M NOTE: PHD s CAD and Sizing software will be revised by September 1, 2004 to reflect these changes. THREE POSITION UNITS Only 90 Mid-position on Double Rack Units are available. SERIES I - Internal Passage DESIGN NO. Imperial Metric For RISx0 2 6 For All Others 1 NOTES: 1) Either optional angle adjustments or shock absorbers must be ordered on all units. (Either option is mandatory.) 2) Switches and switch bracket kits must be ordered separately. UNIT SIZE RIxx12 RIxx2 RIxx12 RIxx2 RIDx10 RIDx0 RISx20 RISx60 ROTATION 180 NOTE: One port control fitting per kit SHOCK ABSORBERS NB - Shock installed both directions NC - Shock installed counterclockwise NW - Shock installed clockwise See note 1 ROTATION SPEED CONTROL KIT NO UNIT SIZE RISxx2 RIDxx2 RISxx2 RIDxx2 RISxx0 RIDxx0 ROTATION SPEED CONTROL VALVE PB - Rotational Speed Controls both directions PC - Rotational Speed Controls counterclockwise PW - Rotational Speed Controls clockwise SHOCK ABSORBER KIT NO UNIT SIZE RIx12 RIx2 RIx12 RIx2 RID10 RID0 RIS20 RIS60 PORTING PLATE KIT NUMBER Kits include:1 Porting Plate, 2 Locating Rings, 4 Fasteners, Required O-Rings OPTIONS M - Reed Magnet, Solid State FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

30 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R9 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RA SHOCK ABSORBER DIMENSION/LOAD CHANGES Effective immediately, PHD will implement changes on certain sizes of Series RA Rotary Actuators to upgrade shock absorbers. This change will provide improved stopping capacity and actuator performance. It will affect shock absorber length on bore size 20 & 2 units, the hex dimensions, and the Kinetic Energy Load on page -8 of CAT-0. Below is the revised shock absorber specifications chart and dimensions which replace the data on page -8 of Catalog 200. Shaded areas show changes from the old specifications. SHOCK ABSORBER SPECIFICATIONS BORE SIZE PHD SHOCK ABSORBER NUMBER * * THREAD TYPE M12 x 1 M14 x 1. M20 x 1. M2 x 1. M2 x 1. in STROKE mm SHOCK ABSORBER WEIGHT lb kg KINETIC ENERGY LOAD in-lb Nm in A MAX. mm *These shock absorbers have an adjustment feature. (See PHD Product Sizing Catalog for details). in.1 B HEX mm 8.0 F FLATS in mm A MAX B HEX F FLAT Make this correction in your current catalog and inform all customers using Series RA Rotary Actuators with shock absorbers. FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

31 DATE: PAGE 2 OF TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R7 SINGLE RACK SERIES RISx2, RISx2 & RISx0 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RI 2 Y THREAD C KK MM SEE PAGE D-6 FOR PRESSURE OUTPUT HUB INTERFACE DIMENSIONS 1 AA 6 NN V 4 Z 2X JJ PORT ( POSITION CONTROL) GG 2X JJ PORT (UNIT CONTROL) LL SEE PAGE D-6 FOR PRESSURE INPUT PORT INTERFACE DIMENSIONS UNIT SIZE RIS12 RIS2 RIS12 RIS2 RIS10 RIS0 SINGLE RACK DIMENSIONS C 1.20 [2.] 1.78 [.0] 1.78 [.0] LETTER DIMENSION V Y Z GG M14 x 1. [7.] [16.] M20 x 1. [12.0] [17.] M20 x 1. [20.0] [17.].71 [18.6].888 [22.6] [2.2] METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ]. PP.29 [7.].472 [12.0].787 [20.0] ZZ PP DOUBLE RACK SERIES RIDx2, RIDx2 & RIDx0 2 C KK 2X MM SEE PAGE D-6 FOR PRESSURE OUTPUT HUB INTERFACE DIMENSIONS 1 AA 6 NN 4 Z 2X JJ PORT ( POSITION CONTROL) 2X JJ PORT (UNIT CONTROL) SEE PAGE D-6 FOR PRESSURE INPUT PORT INTERFACE DIMENSIONS DOUBLE RACK DIMENSIONS UNIT SIZE RID12 RID2 RID12 RID2 RID10 RID0 LETTER DIMENSION C Z GG PP.472 [12.0].60 [16.0].60 [16.0].709 [18.0] [8.0] [48.0].197 [.0].1 [8.0].1 [8.0].29 [7.].472 [12.0] 1. [9.0] METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ]. 2X ZZ PP GG 2X JJ PORT (UNIT CONTROL) LL ( ) A C B A B C P R P R P R UNIT SIZE RIS12 & RID12 RIS2 & RID2 RIS12 & RID12 RIS2 & RID2 RIS10 & RID10 RIS0 & RID0 AA.618 [1.7].84 [21.7] [29.0] METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ]. COMMON LETTER DIMENSION (SINGLE AND DOUBLE) JJ KK LL MM NN M x 0.8 [8.0] [9.0] [9.0] [1.7] 1/8-27 NPT /8-28 BSPP [49.9] [12.] [14.] [21.7] 1/8-27 NPT /8-28 BSPP [60.0] [1.0] [17.8] [29.0] NOTES: 1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS. 2) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION. ) FOR DIMENSIONS NOT GIVEN SEE RIS SINGLE RACK DIMENSIONS PAGE D-4. 4) MID POSITION HOLDING TORQUE ON RID UNITS IS 1/2 CATALOGED OUTPUT TORQUE. FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219) ZZ.807 [20.] [29.] [47.] Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-7

32 7 8 4 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R7 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS PAGE OF MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RI PINION LOCATING RING KIT UNIT RIx12 RIx2 RIx12 RIx2 RIx10 RIx0 A.26 [6.0].26 [6.0].49 [8.9] B 2.9 [7.0].97 [100.0] 4.28 [11.0] Ø C.472 [12.0].472 [12.0].709 [18.0] LETTER DIMENSION C TOL. D E Ø F / [.00]/-[.01] / [.00]/-[.01] / [.00]/-[.01].118 [.0].079 [2.0].276 [7.0] 1.78 [.0] [46.0] 2.28 [8.0].26 [6.0].1 [8.0].472 [12.0] METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ]. NOTE: LOCATING RINGS ARE TO BE PRESSED INTO BODY AND PINION F TOL / [.00]/-[.018] / [.00]/-[.018] / [.00]/-[.01] Ø G.197 [.0].26 [6.0].1 [8.0] Ø H.4 [9.0].4 [9.0].91 [1.0] A 2X F E 2 4 BODY LOCATING RING KIT 2X G PINION LOCATING RING I.D. D A 2X B 4X C 4X H BODY LOCATING RING I.D X D 4X C 2X A BODY LOCATING RING KIT Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-1 2X B M SLOT DIMENSIONS TYPICAL BOTH SIDES (POSITION 1 & ) UNIT SIZE RIx12 RIx2 RIx12 RIx2 RIx10 RIx0 NUT LOCATION M.60 [16.0].787 [20.0].984 [2.0] Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-16 FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

33 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: M1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL All Multi-Motion Actuators have an improved spline base seal. The original O-Ring and backup have been replaced with a Glyd ring seal and back-up. See illustration. OLD STYLE NEW STYLE HIGH PRESSURE SIDE SPLINE BASE SEAL BACKUP This new seal has increased life and is a definite improvement especially in hydraulic application. This change was effective February, All future seal kits will also include this improved seal. Note: This change is currently effective only on standard Buna-N seals. Units with Viton or other seal compounds will still receive the old style O-Ring and back-up until later notification. All customers using a Multi-Motion Actuator should be made aware of this change. FILE UNDER MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

34 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: M2 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES 8000 TANDEM The standard cushion angle for PHD Air/Oil Tandem Multi-Motion Actuators with the -D1 or -D2 option has historically been cataloged as 0. Through recent testing it was discovered that the actual cushioning capability of an 8000 Series Air/Oil Tandems could have been as little as approximately 10. Changes were instituted in November of 1990 in the cushion stud design for these actuators. The effective cushioned travel is now 20 minimum and will be cataloged as such in the future. Make sure on any future orders for 8000 Series Air/Oil Tandem Multi-Motion Actuators with cushions, that the customer is aware of the 20 cushion. FILE UNDER MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

35 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TIONS TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: M PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: MA1 MINIATURE MULTI-MO- Hydraulic Miniature Multi-Motions Eliminated PHD is no longer recommending our miniature Multi-Motion Actuators (MA1) for hydraulic service. These are currently rated at 00 psi for hydraulic service in Catalog 91. We have found the standard seals are not suitable for proper sealing of hydraulic fluids. The volume of units sold for hydraulic service is very low. We recommend that customers requiring hydraulic Miniature Multi-Motion Actuators move up to a Series 1000 to ensure proper performance and satisfaction. This change will be reflected in future catalogs. Convert requests for Miniature Multi-Motions for hydraulic service to Series 1000 units. FILE UNDER MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

36 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: M4 PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES Improved Preloaded Keyway (PK) Shaft Option A change has been made to the preloaded keyway rod end option for all Series Multi-Motion Actuators. A.00" radius has been added to the notch which is used for the preload set screw..00" RADIUS This improvement is a result of feedback from some PHD customers who experienced premature failure of rod ends with the -PK option. This radius adds strength to the shaft and brings the durability of the -PK option up to normal PHD specifications. These improved preloaded keyways will be phased in as inventory permits. All units with -PK option shipped after March 1, 1994 should include this improved design. Inform any customers who may have experienced -PK option rod end failures of this product improvement. FILE UNDER MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

37 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL1 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SA012, SA022, SA02, SA042, SA062 Several dimensional changes have occurred between the model SS and new model SA Series S slides. These changes were made to provide value added benefits based on customer requests. Dimensional Changes: 1) The four thru holes in the bearing housing remain unchanged (04 Model only). 06 Model was 1.62, is now Tapped holes were added on the opposite side of these thru holes for auxiliary mounting. 2) Overall height and width dimensions remain unchanged, however several length dimensions have increased. A) The tool plate thickness has increased. B) The bearing housing length has increased. C) The guide shaft length has increased. ) Threads in the SA042 tool plate are now coarse in place of fine ) The 12 blind threaded holes that were in some model SS slides have been removed (Note these threaded holes were not advertised). ) The port side surface is no longer a completely flat surface. This was changed to accommodate the proximity switch option. Value added changes: 1) Proximity switch option for sensing extent and retract have been added. The proximity switches sense the steel shaft collars and a steel target pin in the tool plate. 2) Shaft collar kits for stroke adjustment and extend shock pads have been added. Retract shock pads are now located externally on the guide rods. This increases the shock pad area. The SA042 and SA062 models continue to use an internal shock pad for extend. The new models SA012, SA022, and SA02 have no internal shock pad for the extend stroke. (See Catalog 91) A stop collar kit must be used to have shock pads on extend for those slides. Stop collars are highly recommended for most applications. ) Dowel pin holes are now optional in the bearing housing and in the tool plate for precise locating of the slide and tooling. 4) The tool plate is now thicker to allow a deeper guide shaft press fit. This will allow the slide to withstand greater impact loads and removes some fatigue loading on the screws. The model SA slides now have socket head cap screws in place of flat head cap screws. This will allow easier repair and reassembly. The nut and washer combination for fastening the piston rod to the tool plate has been eliminated. The tool plate is now machined with a precise bore that the piston rod is pressed into. ) The cylinder bore is now machined completely through the bearing housing. This allows PHD to offer longer stroke lengths. Removing the cap allows access to a hex in the end of the piston rod for easy assembly and repair. 6) Stop collar kits allow the slide stroke to be adjusted to customer requirements. Please make your customers aware that several dimensions have changed from model SS to new model SA design. The model SS is not completely interchangeable with the new design model SA. Whenever possible, we recommend selling the new model SA slide. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

38 DIMENSIONS: S SERIES SLIDES SL1 PAGE 2 OF 2 PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

39 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 PRODUCT TYPE: METRIC SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SA017, SA027, SA07, SA047, SA067 Several dimensional changes have occurred between model SS and new model SA Series S slides. These changes were made to provide value added benefits based on customer requests. Dimensional Changes: 1) The four thru holes in the bearing housing have been changed. The thru holes on the SA047 model have changed from a 1, square pattern to a 2,0 pattern. The SA067 pattern was changed from a 41, to 42,0. Tapped holes were added on the opposite side of these thru holes for auxiliary mounting. 2) Overall height and width dimensions remain unchanged on the SA047 model. On the SA067 model the height changed from 1,0 to 0,0 and the width changed from 101, to 102,0. The following length dimensions have increased: A) The tool plate thickness has increased. B) The bearing housing length has increased. C) The guide shaft length has increased. ) The 12 blind threaded holes that were in some model SS series have been removed (Note these threaded holes were not advertised). 4) The port side surface is no longer a completely flat surface. This was changed to accommodate the proximity switch option. ) Guide shaft have been changed to hard metric diameters. Value added changes: 1) Proximity switch option for sensing extent and retract have been added. The proximity switches sense the steel shaft collars and a steel target pin in the tool plate. 2) Shaft collar kits for stroke adjustment and extend shock pads have been added. Retract shock pads are now located externally on the guide rods. This increases the shock pad area. The SA047 and SA067 models continue to use an internal shock pad for extend. Models SA017, SA027, and SA07 have no internal shock pad for the extend stroke. A stop collar kit must be used to have shock pads on extend for those slides. Stop collars are highly recommended for most applications. ) Dowel pin holes have been added in the bearing housing and in the tool plate. 4) The tool plate is now thicker to allow a deeper guide shaft press fit. This will allow the slide to withstand greater impact loads and removes some fatigue loading on the screws. Model SA slides now have socket head cap screws in place of flat head cap screws. This will allow easier repair and assembly. The nut and washer combination for fastening the piston rod to the tool plate has been eliminated. The tool plate is now machined with a precise bore that the piston rod is pressed into. ) The cylinder bore is now machined completely through the bearing housing. This allows PHD to offer longer stroke lengths. Removing the cap allows access to a hex in the end of the piston rod for easy assembly and repair. 6) Stop collar kits allow the slide stroke to be adjusted to customer requirements. 7) Corrosion resistant coating on guide shafts is standard for corrosion resistance. Please make your customers aware that several dimensions have changed from model SS to new model SA design. The model SS is not completely interchangeable with the new design model SA. Whenever possible we recommend selling the new model SA slide. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

40 DIMENSIONS: S SERIES SLIDES SL2 PAGE 1 OF 2 PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

41 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: RS0, RS042, RS062, RS082, RS012, RS122 The following changes were made to reduce manufacturing costs: 1) A step or turned down diameter on the end of the threaded travel adjustment rod was removed. 2) The counterbore on the back of the tool plate was enlarged to accept the full diameter of the threaded rod. These changes do not affect any dimensions of the slide. TOOLPLATE COUNTERBORE END OF ROD IS NO LONGER STEPPED OR TURNED DOWN If a tool plate or threaded rod needs to be replaced on a design 02 or 0 slide and was manufactured before , both a threaded rod and tool plate need to be ordered. If the threaded rod has a turned down diameter on one end, the slide was manufactured before FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

42 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL4 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES B, C, E, U, AND R SERIES B, C, E, AND U BEARING SEAL SHAFT HOUSING SERIES R WICK SPACER TUBE SHAFT WICK RETAINER FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER Felt lubrication wicks have been added between ball bushings to reduce lubrication maintenance. These wicks will constantly provide a source of lubricant to the guide shafts and bearings. The wicks will be saturated with oil, and should not require any additional lubricant for the life of the bearing. Long stroke units have been susceptible to having dry shafts, thus increasing friction. This value added feature will be gradually phased into production around Bearing replacement kits will include bearings and felt wicks. There is no additional charge for this enhancement. WICK Please make your customer aware that the felt wicks included in the bearing replacement kits will not be used when repairing bearing in a slide manufactured before If your customer expresses a concern of not using the wicks, an older bearing housing may be modified to accommodate the oil wicks. Please consult PHD. PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

43 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES M Single quad seal on air pistons have been changed to dual block-vee seals in order to lower the break away friction on models MS0, MS04, and MS06 Slides. The MS02 remains unchanged and continues to use quad seals. The seal on the oil side of tandem units will continue to be a quad seal. Seal kits after will contain both quad seals and block-vee seals. Please make your customers aware that all seals included in a seal repair kit may not be used. If the piston has a single piston seal groove, use the quad seal. If the piston has two seal grooves, use the block-vee seals. New piston and rod assemblies may be used in slide housings that previously contained single quad seals. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

44 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL6 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 7 MODEL OR SERIES: S, T, R The addition of options for dowel pins have been added to Series R, T, and S Slides. J1 and J2 are the options for the tool plate dowel pin holes. J1 designates close fit dowel pin holes, and J2 designates normal fit dowel pin holes. R1 and R2 are the options for the housings or end blocks. R1 designates close fit dowel pin holes and R2 designates normal fit dowel pin holes. (The front block of Series R will have dowel pin holes and the rear block will have dowel slots.) This will satisfy customers' varying dowel pin hole requirements or needs. Catalog 91 has incorporated these options in the Ordering Data and Dimensional drawings. Inform customers who use Slides, that dowel pin holes are now available. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

45 DIMENSIONS: S SERIES SLIDES SL6 PAGE 2 OF 7 PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

46 DIMENSIONS: T SERIES SLIDES SL6 PAGE OF 7 PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

47 DIMENSIONS: Rx0 SL6 PAGE 4 OF 7 PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

48 DIMENSIONS: Rx04 & Rx06 SL6 PAGE OF 7 PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

49 DIMENSIONS: Rx08 & Rx10 SL6 PAGE 6 OF 7 PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

50 DIMENSIONS: Rx12 SL6 PAGE 7 OF 7 PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

51 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL7 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: TS08 TS081 Slides have 7/16 threaded and thru holes. These mounting holes have been changed to /8 threaded and thru holes to keep the mounting holes on a 1/8" increment which is standard in some companies. This requires a design change, raising the design number to 2 (TS082). This will be shown in all future literature. Old design slides can still be ordered. Catalog 91 reflects this change. All TS081 Slide orders should be checked to see if they can be changed to TS082. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

52 DIMENSIONS: MODEL TS08 PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

53 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL8 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: S, T, R, M, U, B Corrosion resistant plated shaft option -Q is now available on all Slides listed above. This plating gives the outside diameters of the shafts a rust and corrosion resistant coating to prevent damage to the bearings. With this option the ends and any undercuts will be uncoated. Entirely plated shafts are available-consult factory. Options are shown in Catalog 91. ENDS UNPLATED ENDS AND UNDERCUTS UNPLATED Inform all Slide customers of this new problem solving option. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

54 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL9 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: -Q SHAFTING OPTION Option -Q is a corrosion resistant electrocoating for slide shafting. The graph shows data on -Q and other shaft materials from actual PHD salt spray tests. Physical properties of -Q are listed below. Material: Chromium Thickness:.0001/.0002 inch Hardness: 70 RC Plus Friction: Self Lubricating Heat: -400 F to 1600 F (Applies to -Q Shafting Only) Corrosion Resistance: See Chart (Do not use near Sulfuric or Hydrochloric acid) Aesthetics: Satiny, Silver, Matte Finish Safety: FDA and USDA approved (Applies to -Q Shafting Only) RUST COVERAGE 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 0% 40% 0% DRY ALLOY SHAFTING DRY 416 STAINLESS OILED ALLOY SHAFTING OILED 416 STAINLESS DRY -Q SHAFTING 20% 10% SPOTS 0 OILED -Q SHAFTING NOTE: Standard -Q option does not cover cut off ends or undercuts for snap rings. If the entire shaft needs to be plated, contact PHD HOURS IN SALT SPRAY It is obvious from the above chart that the -Q option on shafts is the best method of corrosion resistance. Customers with a history of rust problems, or who have applications where rust may become a problem should be made aware of this new option. Recommend -Q option. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

55 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL10 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: ALL PHD SLIDES Loctite On Slide Shaft Fasteners Starting on approximately August 1, 1991, all fasteners that attach tool plates or end blocks to slide shafts, and all fasteners that thread into the saddle or housing are assembled with removable Loctite. This change has come at the request of a few of our customers who have experienced these shaft fasteners loosening during high speed slide operation. The Loctite is a removable type of adhesive that prevents the screws from loosening due to vibration, but allows them to be taken out for maintenance of the Slide. There will be no additional charge for this product improvement. REMOVABLE LOCTITE Let any customers who have experienced loose shaft fasteners know about this product improvement. This eliminates the problem on their future slides. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

56 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL11 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES S SLIDES The very popular Model SA Slide has been expanded to include a Model SB that has drilled and C'bored holes in the tool plate. These holes allow the tool plate to be used with Transition Plates for mounting other PHD products on the Model SB Slide. These transition plates are not shown in Catalog 91 but are being designed on an as needed basis. The tool plate on the Model SB Slide makes some customer tooling easier to attach. Page 2 of this Technical Data Bulletin provides you with dimensional information on the Model SB Slide tool plate. This new model will be available as of Model Number example: SB 042 X 1-Q New Tool Plate Model Available Inform your customers of this new Slide Model and make sure Model SB is specified when using Transition Plates with Series S Slides. Consult PHD for Transition Plate availability. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

57 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL11 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES S SLIDES FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

58 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL12 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES M New Bearings and Shafts for Series M Slides Starting February 1, 1992, the Series M Slides will have improved bearings and shafts. The bushings that were Duralon will now be a fluoropolymer composite ( TC ). This is the same material used in the popular Series S Slides. The shafts will be standard with PHD's corrosion-resistant plating which also increases their wear resistance. This new bushing and shaft combination will greatly increase the life and the reliability of the Series M Slides. The Slide's design number will change from Design 1 to Design 2. PHD will automatically convert all incoming orders to the new Design 2 bushings and shafts unless specifically noted otherwise. Repair kits will contain bearings with the new material. The Slide dimensions and pricing will remain unchanged. New Standard Corrosion-Resistant Shafts New Improved Bearings Use Fluoropolymer Composite Material Inform your Series M Slides customers of this product improvement and use this information to expand your sales of Series M Slides. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

59 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL1 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES M Compact Switch Now Available on Series M Slide Starting February 1, a new switch bracket kit for the Series M Slide will be available to allow Series 170 Compact Reed and Hall Switches to be used on this Slide Series. The new bracket kit number is 191. The list price for this kit is $4.7. Using this new bracket kit along with the Compact Switches reduces size and price of the Slide package. The Slides must still be ordered with the proper magnetic option for the Switches to function. Bracket Kit Number Compact Proximity Switches Make sure all of your past, present, and future Slide customers are aware of this additional capability. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

60 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES M Compact Switch Now Available on Series M Slide DIMENSIONS FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

61 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 4 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL14 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES C SLIDES Series C Slide Speed Charts Questions have come up regarding maximum speeds for Series C Magnetically Coupled Cylinder Slides. The following three pages contain speed charts (load vs. travel) for all Series C Slides. The charts are based on actual test data using Slides with shock absorbers. Note: None of these tests caused the magnetic piston to uncouple from the slide's saddle. This information may be used to analyze future applications and to assure customers of the C Slide's capabilities. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

62 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL14 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 2 OF 4 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES C SLIDES Series CxU01 Slide Speed Charts Performance Data for CxU01 x 16 (Vertical) 0 & 90 PSI / Up Stroke 0.4 Performance Data CxU01 x 16 (Vertical) 0 & 90 PSI / Down Stroke Time (Seconds) 0.2 Time (Seconds) Stroke (Inches) 0 1. lb. Load lb. Load lb. Load Stroke (Inches) 0 1. lb. Load lb. Load lb. Load 20 Performance Data for CxU01 x 16 (Horizontal) 0 & 90 PSI 1. Time (Seconds) Time values shown were imposed by proper combination of flow controls and shock absorbers. Faster travels may be achieved, but not without potential damage to slide units Stroke (Inches) lb. Load 0 14 lb. Load 90 1 lb. Load lb. Load FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

63 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL14 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE OF 4 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES C SLIDES Series CxU041 Slide Speed Charts Performance Data for CxU041 (Vertical) 0 & 90 PSI / Up Stroke 2.0 Performance Data for CxU041 x 24 (Vertical) 0 & 90 PSI / Down Stroke Time (Seconds) 1.0 Time (Seconds) Stroke (Inches) 0 1. lb. Load lb. Load lb. Load lb. Load Stroke (Inches) 0 1. lb. Load lb. Load lb. Load lb. Load Performance Data for CxU041 x 24 (Horizontal) 0 & 90 PSI Time (Seconds) Time values shown were imposed by proper combination of flow controls and shock absorbers. Faster travels may be achieved, but not without potential damage to slide units Stroke (Inches) 0 1 lb. Load 0 lb. Load 90 1 lb. Load 90 lb. Load 20 2 FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

64 DATE: PAGE 4 OF 4 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL14 Performance Data for CxU061 x 6 (Vertical) 0 & 90 PSI / Up Stroke PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES C SLIDES Series CxU061 Slide Speed Charts Performance Data for CxU061 x 6 (Vertical) 0 & 90 PSI / Down Stroke 0.7 Time (Seconds) 1 Time (Seconds) Stroke (Inches) 0 2 lb. Load 0 18 lb. Load 90 2 lb. Load 90 0 lb. Load Performance Data for Cx061 x 6 (Horizontal) 0 & 60 PSI Stroke (Inches) 0 2 lb. Load 0 18 lb. Load 90 2 lb. Load 90 0 lb. Load Time (Seconds) Time values shown were imposed by proper combination of flow controls and shock absorbers. Faster travels may be achieved, but not without potential damage to slide units Stroke (Inches) 0 1 lb. Load 0 9 lb. Load 90 1 lb. Load 90 9 lb. Load FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

65 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL1 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES C SLIDES Recommendation of Lubricated Air on Series C Slides PHD is now recommending the use of lubricated air on Series C Magnetically Coupled Cylinder Slides. Applications which require reduced speeds and smooth motion will particularly benefit from the use of lubricated air. The internal seals are compatible with standard petroleum-based oil typically used for air cylinder lubrication. This lubricated air is not required, but will greatly enhance the Series C Slide's performance. Inform your Series C Slide customers of the recommendation for lubricated air. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

66 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL16 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SS AND SA SLIDES Improved Shock Pad Adhesive On Series S Slides In some high load applications, customers experienced the shock pad coming off the piston on Series S Slides. PHD has changed the type of adhesive used to secure this shock pad, which has cured this problem. Units shipped after were assembled with this improved adhesive. NEW ADHESIVE USED ON SHOCK PAD Inform any customers who may have encountered problems with shock pads about this product improvement. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

67 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL17 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES B Proper Dowel Pin Hole Usage FOR DOWEL PIN BOTH ENDS ±.002 DIAMETER FOR DOWEL PIN FROM OPPOSITE SIDE CLEARANCE DIA FROM THIS SIDE 2 PLACES EACH END Dowel pin holes in the end blocks of Series B Slides are intended for use with the dowel slot on the opposite end block. Tolerances between the two end blocks do not allow the dowel pin holes to be used for precise location. The use of dowel pin holes on one end and the dowel pin slot on the opposite end do provide a means for locating. The tolerance between the centerline of the dowel hole and the centerline of the dowel slot is ±.002. Inform your customers who use dowel pin holes on Series B Slides of this application recommendation. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

68 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL18 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SA & SB SLIDES SA & SB Slides Modified for PHD Switch As of March 1, 1994, Model SA & SB Slides are available with PHD Series 80 Hall Effect Switches (See Catalog SW02). This change affects the tool plate and all Proximity Switch Kits. The switch target cavity in the tool plate is enlarged to accommodate a new universal switch target. The switch ready kit has a new part number and can be used for either the traditional 6 mm square Proximity Switches or PHD s Series 80 Hall Effect Switches. As of March 1, 1994, all Proximity Switch Kit numbers shown in PHD Catalog 9 will be converted to the new kit numbers by PHD. SLIDE OLD NEW MODEL KIT NUMBER KIT NUMBER Sx Sx Sx Sx Sx Each proximity switch ready kit contains the following items: 1 Target Pin with Magnet 2 Steel Shaft Collars with Screws (one modified with magnetic target) 2 Shock Pads 2 Switch Mounting Brackets x.00 Socket Head Cap Screws Proximity Switches are ordered separately. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

69 DATE: PAGE 2 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL18 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SA & SB SLIDES SA & SB Slides Modified for PHD Switch The changes to the SA & SB Slides and the addition of the PHD Series 80 Hall Effect Switch provide a very cost effective alternative to traditional 6 mm square Proximity Switches. The new Universal Switch Ready Kit is simple and can be used with the PHD 80 Switches or 6 mm square Proximity Switches. SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKET TARGET PIN 6 mm PHD 80 HALL EFFECT SWITCH OR SQUARE PROXIMITY SWITCH (NOT INCLUDED IN KIT, MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY) SHAFT COLLAR WITH MAGNET FOR SERIES 80 SWITCH SENSING SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW SHAFT COLLAR SHOCK PAD LARGER DIAMETER TARGET CAVITY (MARCH 1, 1994) PROXIMITY SWITCH KIT Press target pin with magnet side up for Series 80 Hall Switches and magnet side down for Model 1841 Proximity Switches. Press in target pin until it bottoms out in the hole. Inform all of your SA & SB Slide users of this change and the cost effective switches available on future orders. (Units shipped prior to March 1, 1994 will not accept the new kits without modifying the target cavity in the tool plate.) FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

70 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL19 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SA042, SA047, SB042, SB047 Piston Seal Improved on Size 04 SA and SB Slides Starting July 8, 1994 all size 04 SA and SB Slides will be shipped with an improved piston seal design. This new design incorporates two block vee seals instead of the single "PZ" type seal. In certain applications the "PZ" type piston seal had unacceptable amounts of blow-by and inconsistent performance. All orders received for these units will automatically be upgraded to the new design. The new model numbers are shown below: Old Model Number SA042 SB042 SA047 SB047 New Model Number SA04 (English) SB04 (English) SA048 (Metric) SB048 (Metric) UPGRADE KITS Upgrade kits are available and are ONLY recommended for those few applications where the customer is experiencing piston seal blow-by. The vast majority of units in the field DO NOT have this symptom and require no upgrade kits. Upgrade kits are available on a no charge basis for units under warranty. See page two of this bulletin for kit number information. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

71 DATE: PAGE 2 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL19 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SA042, SA047, SB042, SB047 Piston Seal Improved on Size 04 SA and SB Slides UPGRADE KIT NUMBERS English Metric * 1" STROKE * 2mm STROKE * 2" STROKE * 0mm STROKE * " STROKE * 7mm STROKE * 1 Buna N 2 Viton Upgrade kits contain a piston and rod assembly and all seals required to update and rebuild the slide. A full description of the unit must be included with any order for upgrade kits. This will allow PHD to supply new labels that will contain the new model number. None required unless your customer is experiencing blow-by on 04 size SA and SB Slides. Retrofit those units with the upgrade kits or return to PHD for upgrading. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

72 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL20 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES T, R, S; MODEL SD/SE Stop Collar Tightening Torques Stop collars mounted on the shafts of PHD Slides provide an easy means of adjusting the slide's travel. The socket head cap screw used to secure the collar in place can be "over torqued" causing the stop collar to crack or split. Listed below are recommended torques for stop collar screws for various PHD Slides. SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREWS Stop Collar Tightening Torques STOP COLLAR TIGHTENING TORQUES SLIDE TYPE SA/SB TSxx1 (ENGLISH) TSxx (METRIC) RSxx1 IN-LBS Nm IN-LBS Nm IN-LBS Nm IN-LBS Nm SLIDE SIZE STOP COLLAR TIGHTENING TORQUES SLIDE SLIDE SIZE TYPE SD/SE STD. SHAFT SD/SE OVERSIZE SHAFT IN-LBS Nm IN-LBS Nm This information will be included in future catalogs and product packers. Inform any customers who may have encountered cracked stop collars of these torque specifications. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

73 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL21 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES C Recommendation of PHD Pneu Lube on Series C Slide Cylinder Tubes PHD recommends the use of PHD Pneu Lube on the outside of the cylinder tube on Series C Magnetically Coupled Cylinder Slides. It is important to maintain a grease film of PHD Pneu Lube on the cylinder tube to provide adequate radial bearing lubrication for the saddle magnetic cartridge. PHD Pneu Lube is available as a 14. oz. cartridge from PHD. Use PHD Pneu Lube on cylinder O.D. Inform your Series C Slide customers that it is important to maintain a film of PHD Pneu Lube Grease on the cylinder tube. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

74 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL22 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SD, SE, SK, SL, T, R, & B Easy Replacement Cylinder Call-out Ordering replacement cylinders for many of PHD's Powered Slides is now easy through the use of a simple option code -H4. Here is how it works: 1. Call out the complete slide model number followed by -H4. 2. PHD will supply the complete cylinder with all required options and any features related to the slide unit. This option reduces potential errors when specifying replacement cylinders and ensures that the customer receives the correct replacement unit. This option applies to Series B, R, T, SD, SE, SK, and SL Slides. Future parts sheets will be changed to reflect this replacement cylinder call-out. -H4 OPTION Use the -H4 option for ordering slide cylinder assemblies. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

75 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF MODEL OR SERIES: SD/SE New Ball Bushings and Retaining Design on SD/SE Slides Beginning approximately 7--9, PHD will begin a 2- month phase-in period of converting new orders for the model SD/ SE slide from Design 1 to Design 2. Design 2 changes include: Linear ball bushings will be upgraded to the latest ball bushing technology which will provide increased load capability. This upgrade applies only to the larger sizes 24, 2, and 26. Pages - of this Technical Data Bulletin show revised performance ratings as a result of the new bushings. These graphs supersede the corresponding graphs in Catalog 9 A. Retaining rings will now be used to secure both linear ball and T.C. bushings in the slide body on all sizes. This new design provides easy bushings removal and replacement in the field if necessary. To accommodate the new snap ring design, the body length has been increased slightly on the model SD2, 24, & 2 only. Page 2 of this Technical Data Bulletin provides you information on the dimensional changes. Inform your Series SD/SE customers of this product improvement. 1. Latest ball bushing provides increased performance. 2. Retaining ring design provides easy field replacement.. Dimensional changes. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

76 DATE: PAGE 2 OF TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SD/SE New Ball Bushings and Retaining Design on SD/SE Slides AB + TRAVEL DIMENSIONS: SERIES SD SLIDES Y THREAD THRU FROM THIS SIDE C'BORED FROM OPPOSITE SIDE FOR Q SHCS 4 PLACES 4 C L O R S A C B + TRAVEL U + TRAVEL HH ±.002 BB PORT 2 PLACES F E** 1 D E** C L V SQ W EE** CC*** ±.000 DIA FOR DOWEL PIN 2 PLACES IN TOOL PLATE G 2 THRU DIA & C'BORE FOR DD SHCS 2 PLACES J X1 SHAFT DIA FOR SDB & SDC UNITS X2 SHAFT DIA FOR SDD UNITS Z THREAD FROM OPPOSITE SIDE 4 PLACES CC*** ±.000 DIAMETER FOR DOWEL PIN FROM OPPOSITE SIDE 2 PLACES IN BODY OPTIONAL CC*** DOWEL PIN HOLES SLIDE OPTION J1/J OPTION J2/J6 MODEL CLOSE FIT NORMAL FIT L H C L Sxx x.20 DP.191 x.20 DP Sxx2.209 x.12 DP.220 x.12 DP M Sxx x.12 DP.220 x.12 DP NOTES: Sxx2.79 x.470 DP.770 x.470 DP 1) FOR OPTIONS PB AND DB, ADD TO CYLINDER'S LENGTH (AFFECTS DIMENSIONS B, AB) Sxx26.79 x.00 DP.770 x.00 DP 2) FOR OPTIONS BR, AR, GN, AND GH, ADD BETWEEN DIMENSIONS O AND AB *** Close fit dowel pins are standard in housing. ) FOR OPTIONS GM, AE, AND GG, ADD TO DIMENSION U 4) FOR OPTIONS GO AND GI, ADD HALF BETWEEN DIMENSIONS O AND AB, AND HALF TO OPTION ADDERS DIMENSION U ) FOR GRAPHIC DEPICTION OF OPTIONS AND DIMENSIONS, SEE PAGES -4 TO -9. SIZE PB DB BR AR AE GG/GN GH/GM GI/GO 6) STROKE IS +.00/ ) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE CENTERED ON DESIGNATED CENTERLINE OF THE UNIT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ) PORT LOCATION FOR SDx26 IS NOT ON CENTERLINE 9) *PORT IS #10-2 WITH OPTION -PB ) **TOLERANCE IS ±.0008 BETWEEN CLOSE FIT DOWEL PIN HOLES. TOLERANCE IS ± BETWEEN NORMAL FIT DOWEL PIN HOLES BORE LETTER DIMENSION SIZE SIZE A B C D E** F G H J L M O Q R S 22 / #10 x.00 DP #10 x.21 DP / /4 x.27 DP / /16 x.8 DP /8 x.400 DP SIZE U V W X1 X2 Y Z AB BB CC*** DD EE** HH /4-20 #10-24 x.7 DP.070 1/8 NPT*.1884 x.2 DP 1/4 x.7 DP /4-20 1/4-20 x.40 DP.260 1/8 NPT.209 x.1 DP /16 x.4 DP / /4-20 x.0 DP.76 1/8 NPT.209 x.1 DP /8 x.440 DP /8-16 /8-16 x.69 DP /8 NPT.79 x.47 DP /8 x.68 DP /2-1 /8-16 x.7 DP.61 1/4 NPT.79 x.0 DP 1/2 x.700 DP Shaded dimensions on sizes 2, 24, & 2 are revised. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

77 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE OF MODEL OR SERIES: SD/SE New Ball Bushings and Retaining Design on SD/SE Slides Revised performance graphs: SDB & SEB SDB24 WITH /8" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS DEFLECTION 60 0 A LOAD VS. LIFE A- 100 Million Inches of Travel B- 200 Million Inches of Travel WEIGHT (lb) WEIGHT (lb) 40 0 B TRAVEL (in) TRAVEL (in) WEIGHT (lb) SEB24 WITH /8" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS DEFLECTION WEIGHT (lb) A B LOAD VS. LIFE A- 100 Million Inches of Travel B- 200 Million Inches of Travel TRAVEL (in) TRAVEL (in) FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

78 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 4 OF MODEL OR SERIES: SD/SE New Ball Bushings and Retaining Design on SD/SE Slides Revised performance graphs: SDB & SEB 2 WEIGHT (lb) SDB2 WITH /4" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS DEFLECTION WEIGHT (lb) A B LOAD VS. LIFE A- 100 Million Inches of Travel B- 200 Million Inches of Travel TRAVEL (in) TRAVEL (in) WEIGHT (lb) SEB2 WITH /4" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS DEFLECTION WEIGHT (lb) LOAD VS. LIFE A A- 100 Million Inches of Travel B- 200 Million Inches of Travel B TRAVEL (in) TRAVEL (in) FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

79 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE OF MODEL OR SERIES: SD/SE New Ball Bushings and Retaining Design on SD/SE Slides Revised performance graphs: SDB & SEB 26 WEIGHT (lb) SDB26 WITH 1" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS DEFLECTION WEIGHT (lb) A B 2 4 LOAD VS. LIFE 6 A- 100 Million Inches of Travel B- 200 Million Inches of Travel TRAVEL (in) TRAVEL (in) WEIGHT (lb) SEB26 WITH 1" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS DEFLECTION TRAVEL (in) WEIGHT (lb) A B LOAD VS. LIFE A- 100 Million Inches of Travel B- 200 Million Inches of Travel TRAVEL (in) FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

80 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL24 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: Series R with Shocks Restricted Shock Mounting on Series R Slides Typically shock absorbers can be mounted on the same side of Series R Slides. However, there are some restrictions based on the slide's travel length. Shown below are the minimum travel lengths on Series R Slides that allow the shock absorbers to be mounted on the same side of the unit. MODEL MINIMUM TRAVEL RS04 " RS06 " RS08 4" RS10 4" TOP VIEW with Shocks on Same Side Units with shorter travel lengths do require shocks to be mounted on opposite sides of the slide. Make note in your catalog and inform your customer when ordering Series R Slides with shock absorbers. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

81 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SD/SE SLIDES SD & SE Shock Absorber Catalog Data Correction Page 2 (Catalog S002) Shock Absorber part numbers shown on the bottom of page 2 are old part numbers and should not be used. The new numbers are shown on page 28. PHD SHOCK ACE SLIDE ABSORBER CONTROLS ENIDINE* MODEL SIZE (ACE CONTROLS) PART NO. PART NO. SD/SE 22, MS SP , 2, MS SP-90 OLD NUMBERS Page 28 (Catalog S002) Shock Absorber thread type shown on the top of page 28 should be imperial threads instead of the metric threads that are called out. SLIDE SIZE PHD SHOCK ABSORBER NO x x x x x STROKE (In) THREAD TYPE /4-16 UNF /4-16 UNF 1-12 UNF 1-12 UNF 1-12 UNF ET TOTAL ENERGY PER CYCLE (In. Lbs) ETC TOTAL ENERGY PER HOUR (In. Lbs/hour) 400, , , , ,000 SHOCK ABSORBER WEIGHT (Lbs) NEW (CORRECT) NUMBERS PHD still has some inventory on the old shock absorbers and will honor orders for these until the stock is depleted. Orders after that date will be converted to the new numbers shown on page 28 of Catalog S002. These changes apply to Catalog S002 and will be shown correctly in PHD's complete Catalog 96. None. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

82 - TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL26 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES B, R, & T SLIDES -H to -H1 Option Code Change In an effort to maintain consistency and eliminate confusion, PHD is standardizing on the option code -H1 for designating the slide only option. This change applies to Series B, R, & T Slides which formerly used the -H callout. The -H1 callout is now consistent with the newer slides (Series SD & SE and SG). Catalog 96 and future price lists will reflect this code change. EXAMPLE: NOW -H1 TS 0 1 x 2 x 1 - A - M-V MODEL TS - Slide - 10 psi Air max. TH - Slide - 10 psi Hyd. max. TT - Tandem - Air/oil cylinder with 10 psi Air max. TOOL PLATE EXTENSION Additional distance between tool plate and bearing block in 1" increments. Leave blank if no additional extension is required. CYLINDER OPTIONS H1 - Slide with no cylinder supplied B - Shock Pads on both ends (TS Models only) D - Cushions on both ends (TS Models only) E - Magnetic Piston (Hall Effect) M - Magnetic Piston (Reed) V - Viton Seals None. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

83 - TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL27 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 4 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES S SLIDES Design Change on Series SA/SB 0, 04 and 06 Slides And Standardization of -R1 Close Fit Dowel Pin Holes on All Sizes PHD has begun phasing in design revisions to the Sx0, Sx04, and Sx06 size slides. The phase-in period for the Sx0 and Sx06 sizes began July 1, 1996 and the anticipated date for the Sx04 size is September 1, The design changes to the slides maintain the same mounting pattern, allowing a direct interchange with the previous design. Option -R1 (Close Fit Dowel Pin holes in the slide body) is now standard on all sizes of Series SA and SB Slides. PHD will publish a complete catalog and parts list in September once the Sx04 size phase-in is completed. Option -R1 (Close Fit Dowel Pin Holes in the Slide Body) is now standard on all sizes. Page 2 Page Page 4 Ordering Data Revisions Dimensional Revisions Dimensional and Specification Revisions None Required. PHD will convert orders to the new units and kits as needed. You may want to let your customers know, to minimize questions and confusion. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

84 - TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL27 DATE: PAGE 2 OF 4 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES S SLIDES Design Change on Series SA/SB 0, 04 and 06 Slides And Standardization of -R1 Close Fit Dowel Pin Holes on All Sizes To reflect the changes to the Sx0, Sx04, and Sx06 sizes, the design number has been changed. Shaded areas indicate changes to the ordering data. TO ORDER SPECIFY: Series, Size, Design No., Slide Travel, and Options. SERIES SA - Standard mounting holes in tool plate SB - Mounting holes in tool plate for PHD Transition Plates DESIGN NO. SIZE IMPERIAL UNITS METRIC UNITS OPTIONS J1 - Close fit dowel pin holes in the tool plate (Standard on metric units) J2 - Normal fit dowel pin holes in the tool plate (For imperial units only) Q1- Corrosion resistant guide shafts, raw ends Q6- Total corrosion resistant guide shafts R2- Normal fit dowel pin holes in the slide body (For imperial units only) Z1- Electroless nickel plating of ferrous parts NOTE: See Dimension pages of Catalog 96 for locations and tolerances of dowel pin holes. SA 01 x 1-1/2 - Q1 SIZE 01 - /16" bore cylinder with /16" diameter guide shaft, mm diameter guide shaft 02 - /8" bore cylinder with 1/4" diameter guide shaft 6 mm diameter guide shaft 0-12 mm bore cylinder with 10 mm diameter guide shaft mm bore cylider with 16 mm diameter guide shaft 06-2 mm bore cylinder with 20 mm diameter guide shaft IMPERIAL TRAVEL SIZE in 01-1/2, 1, 1-1/2 02-1/2, 1, 1-1/2 0-1/2, 1, 1-1/2 04-1, 2, 06-1, 2, Tolerance for Travel length is +.060,.000. METRIC TRAVEL SIZE in 01-12, 2, , 2, , 2, , 0, , 0, 7 Tolerance for Stroke length is +.1.0, -0.0 NOTES: 1) Shock pads are standard on retract only for sizes 01, 02, and 0. Shock pads are located on guide shafts. Shock pads are standard on extend and retract for sizes 04 and 06. Retract shock pads are located on the guide shafts. Extend shock pad is located internally on the piston. 2) Stop collars are recommended for high cycle speed applications and high load applications. Extend shock pads are included with the stop collars to remove the impact load from the piston rod. Stop collars may be used as travel adjustment. ) Barb fittings are included with 01, 02, and 0 size slides. PROXIMITY SWITCH READY KITS UNIT KIT NUMBER SIZE IMPERIAL METRIC For use with Series 80 6 mm Hall Effect Switches. See page -11 of Catalog 96 or page 4 of this bulletin for more information. COLLAR AND SHOCK PAD KITS UNIT KIT NUMBER SIZE IMPERIAL METRIC See page -11 of Catalog 96 or page 4 of this bulletin for more information. Also affected by the design changes are the Proximity Switch ready kits and Shock pad and Collar Kits. Listed at left are the new kit numbers where applicable. -R1 OPTION WAS REMOVED FROM THE ORDERING DATA. IT IS NOW STANDARD ON ALL UNITS. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

85 DIMENSIONS: SERIES SA & SB SLIDES Following are new dimensional drawings for the Series S Slides. Shaded areas indicate changes from the previous design. D C L 4X K THREAD THRU P A + TRAVEL RETRACTED O B C S U + TRAVEL 2X THREADED HOLE FOR PROXIMITY SWITCH BRACKET SEE OPTION PAGE FOR DETAIL F E C** 4X Y THREAD FROM OPPOSITE SIDE C'BORE FROM THIS SIDE FOR Q SHCS 2X BB PORT C** C L W V ±.002 [±.0] SLIDE MODEL Sx012 [Sx017] Sx022 [Sx027] Sx0 [Sx08] Sx044 [Sx049] Sx06 [Sx068] AA (-J1) CLOSE FIT.064 [2 x 4DP].0947 [2. x DP].129 [ x 6 DP].1884 [4 x 8 DP].209 [6 x 12 DP] G DOWEL PIN HOLE GG (-J2, -R2) NORMAL FIT X Ø AA ±.000 (-J1)*** [+0.02/.000]DOWEL PIN OPTIONAL GG DIM (FOR -J2 OPTION) MOUNTING HOLES: CENTERED ON DESIGNATED CENTERLINE **DOWEL PIN HOLES TOLERANCE IS ±.000 [±.0127] ***-J1 IS STANDARD ON METRIC UNITS ONLY V ±.002 L SHOCK PAD REF H DD H/2 N R 2X Ø AA ±.000 STANDARD [+.02/.000] DOWEL PIN FROM OPPOSITE SIDE OF UNIT OPTIONAL GG DIM (FOR -R2 OPTION) 2X Ø X SHAFT CC FF C L G MODEL BORE SIZE Sx012 /16 SERIES SB THRU DIA AND C'BORE FOR EE SHCS FROM OPPOSITE SIDE 4 PLACES P RETRACTED O SHOCK PAD REF M SLOT FOR PROXIMITY SWITCH SEE OPTION PAGE FOR DETAIL T Z J [Sx017] Sx022 [Sx027] Sx0 [Sx08] Sx044 [Sx049] Sx06 [Sx068] [8] /8 [10] [12] [12] [20] [20] [20] [2] A 1.12 [0] 1.12 [0] 1.7 [] 1.87 [48] [4] B.62 [14].62 [14].62 [14].62 [18].812 [22] C**.62 [14].62 [16].87 [22] 1.2 [0] [42] D.2 [7].7 [10]. [1].7 [19] 1 [2] E.62 [16].7 [20] 1 [26] 1. [40] 2 [2] F 1.7 [6] 1.62 [44] [7] [76].98 [100] G.2 [8].7 [10]. [14].7 [20] 1 [26] H.48 [12].62 [16].812 [21] 1.2 [0] 1.7 [44] J.1 [14].7 [20].97 [2] 1.4 [6] [48.] K -48 [M2. x.4] 4-40 [M x.] 6-2 [M4 x.7] [M x.8] 1/4-20 [M6 x 1] L.1 [14].781 [21] [26] 1.49 [8] [49.] M.1 [14].7 [20].97 [2] 1.4 [4] [4] N. [1].469 [12].62 [1].7 [19].81 [21] O.7 [10].7 [10]. [14].7 [20] 1.0 [26] P.47 [11.].47 [11.].62 [1.].87 [2] [1] LETTER DIMENSION Q R S T #2 x.24 DP N/A [M2.] [9.] [7] [N/A] #4 x.2 DP [M] [10] [8] [9] #6 x.198 DP [M4] [12] [11] [1] #10 x.21 DP [M] [1] [1] [19] 1/4 x.27 DP [M6] [16] [21] [24] U.48 [12].48 [12].8 [14.].709 [18].884 [22] V.219 [6].2 [7].69 [9.].48 [12].94 [1.] W 1 [26] 1.12 [0] [41] [4] 2.87 [7] Numbers in [ ] are in mm or for metric units. X.188 [].2 [6].94 [10].472 [12].787 [20] C L Y 4-40 x.2 DP [M x. x 8 DP] 6-2 x.7 DP [M4 x.7 x 10 DP] x. DP [M x.8 x 12. DP] 1/4-20 x.62 DP [M6 x 1 x 16 DP] /16-18 x.87 DP [M8 x 1.2 x 20 DP] Z N/A [N/A].62 [17.].866 [22] 1.12 [28.] [8] CC.27 [8].2 [14].769 [20] 1.14 [28] 1.2 [8.] DD.01 [1].062 [2].094 [2.].12 [4].12 [] FF.7 [8]. [10].7 [14] 1 [20] 1. [26] EE # x.11 DP [10] #4 x.11 DP [10] #6 x.2 DP [18] #10 x.21 DP [24] 1/4 x. DP [8] BB -6 [M x.] 10-2 [M x.8] 10-2 [M x.8] 1/8 NPT [G1/8 BSP] 1/8 NPT [G1/8 BSP] All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

86 ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES S SLIDES Following are affected changes to specifications on the revised sizes. Shaded areas indicate changes from the previous design. PRESSURE RATINGS All Series S Slides have a maximum working pressure rating of 10 psi air and are for pneumatic use only. OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND SEALS The standard slide has Buna-N seals for general use between -20 and +180 F. They are compatible with standard paraffin-based hydraulic oil used for lubrication of air cylinders. SPECIFICATIONS GUIDE EFFECTIVE PISTON LOAD CAPACITY lb [N] UNIT WEIGHT lb [g] UNIT BORE SHAFTS AREA in 2 [cm 2 ] ATTACHED UNATTACHED STATIC TRAVEL SIZE in [cm 2 ] in [cm 2 ] EXTEND RETRACT DYNAMIC DYNAMIC 1/2 [12] 1 [2] 1-1/2 [40] 2 [0] [7] 01 /16 [8.0] /16 [.0].076 [0.49].07 [0.6].7 [1.] 1.88 [8.0].7 [16.0].188 [8].240 [109].294 [1] 02 /8 [9.] 1/4 [6.0].110 [0.71].082 [0.].7 [.0].7 [16.0] 7.0 [.0].294 [1].88 [176].480 [218] [12.0].94 [10.0].17 [1.1].12 [0.8] 2.00 [8.0] [44.0] [88.0].62 [2].718 [2].87 [97] [20.0].472 [12.0].487 [.14].409 [2.64].00 [22.0] 2.00[111.0] 0.00 [222.0] 1.67 [742] [100] [1267] [2.0].787 [20.0] [8.0] [6.91] [44.0] 0.00[222.0] [444.0].494[18] 4.98 [208].700[28] PROXIMITY SWITCH READY KITS.296 [7.] 2X.20 WIDE SLOT x.01 DEEP [6. x 0.8] STEEL SHAFT COLLAR IS TARGET FOR EXTEND SENSING PROXIMITY SWITCH 1.18 [0.0].1 [.].00 [12.].7 [8.].204 [.0] PROXIMITY SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKET 4-40 x.00 SHCS [M x 0. x 16.0] UNIT SIZE * 04* 06* KIT NUMBER IMPERIAL METRIC [10.] *NEW DESIGN KITS ONLY. CANNOT BE USED FOR PHASED OUT DESIGNS. TARGET FOR RETRACT SENSING PROXIMITY SWITCH EACH PROXIMITY SWITCH READY KIT CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: 1 TARGET PIN WITH MAGNET 2 STEEL SHAFT COLLARS (ONE WITH MAGNETIC TARGET) 2 SHOCK PADS 2 SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKETS x.00 SHCS SERIES 80 SWITCHES ARE ORDERED SEPARATELY. MODEL NO [.] HALL EFFECT SWITCHES DESCRIPTION NPN VDC WITH 2 METER CABLE PNP VDC WITH 2 METER CABLE NPN VDC WITH QUICK CONNECT PNP VDC WITH QUICK CONNECT REED SWITCHES MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION NPN OR PNP VDC WITH 2 METER CABLE NPN OR PNP VDC WITH QUICK CONNECT OPTIONAL 6 mm [2 m] SQUARE PROXIMITY SWITCH WITH 6 FT CABLE LENGTH 6mm SQUARE INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCH MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION NPN 10-0 VDC WITH 2 METER CABLE PNP 10-0 VDC WITH 2 METER CABLE SEE SECTION 7 OF CATALOG 96 FOR SWITCH INFORMATION COLLAR AND SHOCK PAD KITS.62 DIA [16.0] [6.0] B C [6.] [1.0] Sx012 MODEL ONLY Sx017 MODEL ONLY A DIA D DIA UNIT KIT NUMBER LETTER DIMENSION [mm] SIZE IMPERIAL METRIC A B C D [9.0].062 [1.].12 [8.0].62 [N/A] 02 0* 04* 06* [1.0].91 [1.0].87 [22.2] 1.12 [28.].062 [1.].062 [1.].118 [.0].197 [.0].12 [8.0].4 [11.0].11 [1.0].90 [1.0].688 [18.0].87 [22.2] 1.12 [28.] 1.00 [8.0] *NEW DESIGN KITS ONLY. CANNOT BE USED FOR PHASED OUT DESIGNS. SHOCK PAD EACH COLLAR AND SHOCK PAD KIT CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: 2 STEEL SHAFT COLLARS 2 SHOCK PADS 2 SHCS SHCS SHAFT COLLAR Numbers in [ ] are in mm or for metric units.

87 - TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL28 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SK/SL SLIDES Revised Minimum Travel on SK/SL Slides The ordering data for Series SK/SL Slides in Catalog 96 incorrectly shows minimum travel lengths offered in addition to minimum travel lengths available. Shown below in shaded areas are correct minimum travel lengths available. PRODUCT S - Slide SLIDES WITH TC COMPOSITE BUSHINGS SLIDE SHAFT SIZE TYPE SIZE DIA. (mm) C 1 8 D 1 10 (oversize) C 2 10 D 2 12 (oversize) C 12 D 16 (oversize) C 4 16 D 4 20 (oversize) C 20 D 2 (oversize) C 66 2 D 66 0 (oversize) E 66 (oversize) SLIDE TRAVEL SIZE SERIES K SERIES L 1 2 mm to 00 mm 2 mm to 00 mm 2 2 mm to 00 mm 2 mm to 00 mm 2 mm to 00 mm 2 mm to 40 mm 4 0 mm to 40 mm 0 mm to 600 mm 0 mm to 40 mm 0 mm to 600 mm 66 0 mm to 0 mm 0 mm to 700 mm Available in mm increments. Minimum travel required for all SK or SL Slides for use with ISO cylinders is: Size 1 2 mm Size 4 0 mm Size 2 2 mm Size 0 mm Size 2 mm Size 66 0 mm Slide travel will be 0. to 1.0 mm less than the ISO cylinder stroke on -H11 or -H12 units when properly adjusted. TO ORDER SPECIFY: Product, Series, Type, Slide Size, Slide Travel, and Options. With Cylinder Example: SKBx100-E-AR-GM-BS Without Cylinder Example: SKBx100-H12-AR-GM-BS WITH CYLINDER OPTIONS DB- Adjustable cushions on extension and retraction* E - Hall Effect magnetic piston M - Reed switch magnetic piston WITHOUT CYLINDER OPTION This option is required for slide with user supplied ISO Cylinder. H11- Slide for VDMA/ISO cylinders (4,, and 66 sizes only) H12- Slide for ISO cylinder (1, 2, and sizes only) S K B x 100 x 2 DB E AR GM BS SERIES K- Short body L - Long body SLIDES WITH LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS SLIDE SHAFT SIZE TYPE SIZE DIA. (mm) B 1 8 B 2 10 B 12 B 4 16 B 20 B 66 2 TOOL PLATE EXTENSION Additional distance between tool plate and bearing body in 1 mm increments. Leave blank if additional extension is not required. Minimum tool plate extension for all SK slides only with ISO cylinders is 0 mm, if tool extension is required. NOTES: 1) -BR not available with tool plate extension. 2) *Unit dimensions are affected by these options. See Catalog 96 drawings for complete details. Shock pads come standard with the travel adjustment options and do not need to be specified separately when travel adjustment is ordered. ) **Shock absorber ready options include shock absorber stop brackets mounted on the shaft, a stop collar on the opposite shaft, and threaded holes in the slide body for mounting the shock. 4) Cylinder Proximity Switch Mounting Brackets and Shock Absorbers must be ordered separately. SLIDE OPTIONS AE - Travel adjustment and shock pads on extension* AR - Travel adjustment and shock pads on retraction* BR - Shock pads on retraction* BS - Shock pads on extension for use with options GM or GO only BT - Shock pads on retraction for use with option GN or GO only GG - Travel adjustment and shock pads on extension with provisions for proximity switches in both directions* GH - Travel adjustment and shock pads on retraction with provisions for proximity switches on retraction GI - Travel adjustments, shock pads and provisions for proximity switches on both ends GM - Shock absorber ready on extension** GN - Shock absorber ready on retraction** GO - Shock absorber ready on extension and retraction** GV - Side mounting holes in position number 2 Q1 - Corrosion resistant guide shafts (ends unplated) None. PHD will flag any orders received. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

88 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL29 DATE: 2/1/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SA/SB Snap Ring Groove Modification A modification has been made to Series SA/SB 0 and 08 size slide. The snap ring groove holding the internal bushing in the body has been moved back.00" to provide a more robust design. To accommodate this, the bushing has been shortened by.00". This revision to the body will be phased-in as current inventory is depleted. To support this modification, all repair kits currently being shipped contain the shortened bushing with two seal retainers. When repairing units in the field, two seal retainers will be required for pre-modified bodies, and one seal retainer for modified bodies. Again, this affects only the series 0 slides. REPAIR KIT FOR SERIES: SA0 & SA08 SB0 & SB08 POSSIBLE.00 OR 1.27 mm GAP BUSHING BUSHING AND CAP SEAL PACKER # SEAL RETAINER SNAP RING GROOVE Due to design changes to the bushing and body, some units may require the use of 2 seal retainers, which are included with this kit. The original may have used only 1 seal retainer. See assembly instructions below. Insert the new bushing, rod seal, bushing and cap seal, and seal retainer into the slide body. If a gap of more than.00 or 1.27 mm (equal to the thickness of 1 seal retainer) exists between the seal retainer and the snap ring groove, the second seal retainer is required. Inform current customers of SA/SB 0 and 08 of this modification. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

89 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL0 DATE: /29/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SA AND SB Mounting Screw Size Change Effective immediately, PHD has changed the specification of the socket head cap screw size for mounting the SA017 and SB017 slides. An M2 socket head cap screw is now specified from the previous M2.. Reference page B-4 in Catalog 98. P A + TRAVEL RETRACTED O B C S U + TRAVEL 2X THREADED HOLE FOR PROXIMITY SWITCH BRACKET SEE OPTION PAGE FOR DETAIL 4X Y THREAD FROM OPPOSITE SIDE C'BORE FROM THIS SIDE FOR Q SHCS C* C L 2X BB PORT W V ±.002 [±.0] SHOCK PAD REF N R 2X Ø AA ±.000 STANDARD [+.02/.000] DOWEL PIN FROM OPPOSITE SIDE OF UNIT OPTIONAL GG DIM (FOR -R2 OPTION) 2X Ø X SHAFT BORE SIZE MODEL Sx012 [Sx017] Sx022 [Sx027] Sx0 [Sx08] Sx044 [Sx049] Sx06 [Sx068] /16 [8] /8 [10] [12] [12] [20] [20] [2] [2] A 1.12 [0] 1.12 [0] 1.7 [] 1.87 [48] [4] B C** D E F G [14] [14] [7] [16] [6] [8] [14] [16] [10] [20] [44] [10] [14] [22] [1] [26] [7] [14] [18] [0] [19] [40] [76] [20] [22] [42] [2] [2] [100] [26] LETTER DIMENSION H J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z AA BB CC DD EE FF #2 x.24 DP N/A x.2 DP N/A # x.11 ±.010 DP.7 [12] [14] [M2. x.4] [14] [14] [1] [10] [11.] [M2] [9.] [7] [N/A] [12] [6] [26] [] [M x. x 8 DP] [N/A] [2 x 4 DP] [M x.] [8] [1] [M2 x 2.62 ±.2 DP] [10] #4 x.2 DP x.7 DP #4 x.11 ±.010 DP. [16] [20] [M x.] [21] [20] [12] [10] [11.] [M] [10] [8] [9] [12] [7] [0] [6] [M4 x.7 x 10 DP] [17.] [2. x DP] [M x.8] [14] [2] [M x.6 ±.2 DP] [10] #6 x.198 DP x. DP #6 x.20 ±.020 DP.7 [21] [2] [M4 x.7] [26] [2] [1] [14] [1.] [M4] [12] [11] [1] [14.] [9.] [41] [10] [M x.8 x 12. DP] [22] [ x 6 DP] [M x.8] [20] [2.] [M4 x 4.6 ±.0 DP] [18] #10 x.21 DP /4-20 x.62 DP /8 NPT #10 x.21 ±.020 DP 1 [0] [6] [M x.8] [8] [4] [19] [20] [2] [M] [1] [1] [19] [18] [12] [4] [12] [M6 x 1 x 16 DP] [28.] [4 x 8 DP] [G1/8 BSP] [28] [4] [M x.61 ±.0 DP] [24] / /4 x.27 DP /16-18 x.87 DP /8 NPT /4 x. ±.020 DP 1. [44] [48.] [M6 x 1] [49.] [4] [21] [26] [1] [M6] [16] [21] [24] [22] [1.] [7] [20] [M8 x 1.2 x 20 DP] [8] [6 x 12 DP] [G1/8 BSP] [8.] [] [M6 x 6.6 ±.0 DP] [8] Numbers in [ ] are in mm or for metric units. Inform future purchasers of the size SA017 and SB017 slides. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

90 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL1 DATE: 8/27/99 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SK AND SL Design Change to Series SK/SL Slides Effective October 1999, PHD will implement a design change to sizes 2,, 4,, and 6 on Series SK/SL. Size 1 will not be affected. The significant change involves replacing the existing cylinders with the Series CV ISO Cylinders. Following are comparison charts showing the major changes in bore size, effective piston area, and slide length. PHD will release a revised catalog upon implementation of the redesign. KK + TRAVEL BORE Ø EFFECTIVE PISTON AREA mm 2 KK DIM UNIT EXTEND RETRACT SK SL OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEW SIZE SIZE SIZE SIZE SIZE DIMENSIONS IN ARE IN mm. Inform current customers of this product's changes. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

91 DATE: --02 PAGE 1 OF TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SGxM Design Change to Series SGxM Slides As a result of a vendor change, effective immediately the Series SGxM Slide s design number has been changed from -2 to - for imperial units and from -6 to -7 for metric. Specifically, the changes affect dimensions of the switches, brackets, and switch mounting grooves on the rodless cylinder. The following pages indicate updated ordering data, dimensional drawings, elimination of the L4 option, and switch part numbers and associated data. In addition, revisions to calculations for determining maximum static loads are included. This change is a separate issue not associated with the above revisions. Shaded areas indicate revised data to section D of Catalog Please keep this bulletin with your catalog for future reference. TO ORDER SPECIFY: Product, Series, Type, Cylinder Option, Design No., Size, Travel, and Options. PRODUCT S - Slide TYPE B - Standard linear ball bushing, standard shaft C - TC bushing, standard shaft D - TC bushing, oversize shaft DESIGN NO. - Imperial 7 - Metric SLIDE TRAVEL (in) SIZE IMPERIAL UNITS 2 1 to to to to 6 Available in 1/4" increments. SLIDE TRAVEL [mm] SIZE METRIC UNITS 6 2 to to to to 91 Available in mm increments. S G B M x 6 BB Q1 Z1 H9 SERIES G - Gantry CYLINDER OPTION M - Rodless cylinder mounted NOTES: 1) All units are shock absorber ready as standard. Shock absorber kits are ordered separately. See Slides section of PHD s main catalog for complete ordering information. 2) Shock absorbers are not plated with -Z1 option. ) SGxM cylinder section comes standard with cushions and magnetic piston on both ends. 4) Option -CB provides targets for use with 8 mm barrel proximity switches. ) See page 14 for directions nominated extension and retraction when ordering -BE or -BR options. 6) Option -BB and -BR are not available together with shock absorbers. 7) See pages 16 and 17 for switch information. SIZE - 2 mm rodless cylinder with 12 mm shaft standard, 16 mm shaft oversize 4-2 mm rodless cylinder with 16 mm shaft standard, 20 mm shaft oversize - 2 mm rodless cylinder with 20 mm shaft standard, 2 mm shaft oversize 6-40 mm rodless cylinder with 2 mm shaft standard, 0 mm shaft oversize SHOCK ABSORBER KITS (See Note 1) SLIDE MODEL SGxMx SGxMx4, SGxMx, SGxMx6 SHOCK ABS. NO x x SLIDE OPTIONS BB - Shock Pad both directions BE - Shock Pad on extension BR - Shock Pad on retraction CB - Proximity Switch ready both ends (See Note 4) GY - Saddle mounting in position 1 (Not available on size slide) L6 - Lube fitting in saddle in position Q1 - Corrosion-resistant guide shafts (ends unplated) Z1 - Electroless nickel plated ferrous metal parts -L4 and -R Options removed- Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-24 Inform potential customers of the Series SGxM of these revisions. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

92 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 DATE: --02 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 2 OF MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SGxM MM A + TRAVEL H NN MM 4X T THREAD THIS SIDE, COUNTERBORE FROM THE OPPOSITE SIDE FOR Q SHCS EXTENSION END RETRACTION END 6X BB PORTS GG II OO C L 2X CUSHION NEEDLE THIS SIDE ONLY 4 F R E* EE I M C L P W 2X Ø Z +.001/-.000 [+.02/-.000] FOR DOWEL PIN, AA DP FF 1 E* 2X KK THD THRU SHOCK MOUNTING HOLE 2X Ø X1 SHAFT FOR SGB & SGC UNITS 2X Ø X2 SHAFT FOR SGD UNIT Y O N CC D C + TRAVEL LL + TRAVEL DD O 4X THRU Ø & COUNTERBORE FOR S SHCS K BOTH ENDS 2 HH Ø R +.001/-.000 [+.02/-.000] FOR DOWEL PIN, U DP B + TRAVEL 1 [2.4] MAX TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT J L 1/2 [12.7] MAX TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT JJ G Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-26 *DIMENSION E IS FROM CENTERLINE OF GUIDE SHAFT. SERIES SK/SL SLIDE TO SERIES SG WITH RODLESS CYLINDER SLIDE MODULAR DESIGN HARDWARE HARDWARE KITS CANTILEVER SK/SLxx72 SK/SLxx7 SK/SLxx74 SK/SLxx7 GANTRY SGxx7 SGxx74 SGxx7 SGxx76 DOWEL PINS Ø 8mm x 20 Ø 8mm x 20 Ø 8mm x 20 Ø 8mm x 20 SHCS M6 x 4mm M8 x mm M10 x 60mm M12 x 70mm STANDARD Z1 OPTION Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-27 FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

93 THESE CHANGES ARE NOT RELATED TO CYLINDER DESIGN CHANGE TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 DATE: --02 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE OF MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SGxM SLIDE MODEL SGBMx SGCMx SGDMx SGBMx4 SGCMx4 SGDMx4 SGBMx SGCMx SGDMx SGBMx6 SGCMx6 SGDMx6 MAXIMUM LOADS HORIZONTAL LOAD MAXIMUM STATIC OR SHOCK LOAD MAXIMUM DYNAMIC LOAD lb N lb N (T/2 +.61) 679 (T/2 +.61) (T/2 +.80) 118 (T/2 +.80) (T/ ) 2679 (T/ ) (T/ ) 4496 (T/ ) 19.9 (T/ ) (T/ ) (T/ ) 1481 (T/ ) (T/ ) 290 (T/ ) (T/ ) 006 (T/ ) ** ** 186 ** ** 40 ** ** 6 ** ** ** ** 827. ** ** 112. ** ** 21.1 ** ** TORQUE LOAD MAXIMUM STATIC TORQUE MAXIMUM DYNAMIC TORQUE in-lb Nm in-lb Nm (T/2 +.61) (T/2 +.61) (T/2 +.80) 2087 (T/2 +.80) (T/ ) 82 (T/ ) (T/ ) (T/ ) 1 (T/ ) 0.9 (T/ ) (T/ ) 72 (T/ ) (T/ ) 14 (T/ ) (T/ ) 294 (T/ ) torque* 1.9 torque* 1.9 torque* torque* torque* torque* torque* 2.0 torque* 2.0 torque*.040 torque* torque*.048 torque* torque*.02 torque* torque*.08 torque*.08 *This formula yields equivalent horizontal load value. See appropriate Load vs. Life graph on pages D-0 to D-. T = Travel inch [m] **See appropriate TC Load vs. Life Graph for maximum loads on pages D-0 to d-. TORSIONAL DEFLECTION CALCULATIONS ANGLE FORCE L TQ = Torque in-lb [Nm] (L x Force) T = Saddle travel inch [mm] Angle = Degrees Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-29 IMPERIAL UNIT SGBM, SGCM TQ x (T +.996) x.261 x 10 - = Angle SGDM TQ x (T +.996) x 1.0 x 10 - = Angle SGBM4, SGCM4 TQ x (T ) x 1.0 x 10 - = Angle SGDM4 TQ x (T ) x 4.22 x 10-6 = Angle SGBM, SGCM TQ x (T +.70) x 4.22 x 10-6 = Angle SGDM TQ x (T +.70) x 1.71 x 10-6 = Angle SGBM6, SGCM6 TQ x (T ) x 1.71 x 10-6 = Angle SGDM6 TQ x (T ) x 8.42 x 10-7 = Angle SGBM7, SGCM7 SGDM7 SGBM74, SGCM74 SGDM74 SGBM7, SGCM7 SGDM7 SGBM76, SGCM76 SGDM76 METRIC UNIT TQ x (T ) x 1.16 x 10 - = Angle TQ x (T ) x.600 x 10-6 = Angle TQ x (T ) x.600 x 10-6 = Angle TQ x (T ) x x 10-6 = Angle TQ x (T ) x x 10-6 = Angle TQ x (T ) x 6.01 x 10-7 = Angle TQ x (T ) x 6.01 x 10-7 = Angle TQ x (T ) x x 10-7 = Angle ANGLE FORCE L SGBM, SGCM SGDM SGBM4, SGCM4 SGDM4 SGBM, SGCM SGDM SGBM6, SGCM6 SGDM6 IMPERIAL UNIT TQ x (T +.996) x 1.71 x 10-8 = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T +.996) x 6.11 x 10-9 = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x.62 x 10-9 = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x 2. x 10-9 = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T +.70) x 1.7 x 10-9 = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T +.70) x 7.48 x = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x 6.69 x = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x.22 x = Tangent of Angle SGBM7, SGCM7 SGDM7 SGBM74, SGCM74 SGDM74 SGBM7, SGCM7 SGDM7 SGBM76, SGCM66 SGDM76 METRIC UNIT TQ x (T ) x 9.2 x = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x.0 x = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x 1.96 x = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x 1.27 x = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x 9.4 x 10-1 = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x 4.04 x 10-1 = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x.61 x 10-1 = Tangent of Angle TQ x (T ) x 1.74 x 10-1 = Tangent of Angle FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

94 DATE: --02 PAGE 4 OF BR SHOCK PAD ON RETRACTION CB IMPERIAL [METRIC] SGx [SGx7] SGx4 [SGx74] SGx [SGx7] SGx6 [SGx76] A 6.69 [170] [189.] 8.44 [214.] [240] B.217 [.].118 [].118 [].118 [] Numbers in [ ] are for metric units or in mm. TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SGxM C.4 [9].4 [9].4 [9].4 [9] IMPERIAL [METRIC] SGx [SGx7] SGx4 [SGx74] SGx [SGx7] SGx6 [SGx76] PROXIMITY SWITCH READY BOTH ENDS A.7 [14.].7 [14.].7 [14.].7 [14.] B 1.10 [28] 1.10 [28] 1.10 [28] 1.10 [28] C [2] [7.] 1.69 [4] [1] Numbers in [ ] are for metric units or in mm. D.4 [9].4 [9].1 [8].1 [8] Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-6 GY SADDLE MOUNTING IN POSTITION 1 L6 LUBE FITTING IN SADDLE PORT POSITION IMPERIAL [METRIC] SGx4 [SGx74] SGx [SGx7] SGx6 [SGx76] A.96 [100. mm] [114 mm].492 [19. mm] B 2.68 [67. mm] 2.79 [71 mm] 2.84 [72 mm] Numbers in [ ] are for metric units or in mm. C 1/4-20 x.0 [M6 x 1.0 x 12 mm] /16-18 x.0 [M8 x 1.2 x 12 mm] /8-16 x.9 [M10 x 1.2 x 1 mm] Removed -L4 Option- Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-7 Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-7 HORIZONTAL APPLICATION STEP 1: Application Data Example: SGBM x 18 inch travel and 22 lb payload (WTM) Weight = 2 lb (Total Moving Weight) (V) Velocity = ft/sec (Speed of Travel) (d) Cylinder Bore Diameter = 1-1/2" (P) Operating Pressure = 80 psi (C) Cycles/Hr = 800 c/hr WM = (.087 x 18 in) Refer to Catalog 2002, WM = 10.0 lb Page D-40 WTM = WTM = 2.0 lb VERTICAL APPLICATION STEP 1: Application Data Example: SGBM x 8 inch travel with an 8 lb payload (WTM) Weight = 11.7 lb (Total Moving Weight) (V) Velocity = ft/sec (Speed of Travel) (d) Cylinder Bore Diameter = 1-1/8" (P) Operating Pressure = 80 psig (C) Cycles/Hour = 600 c/hr FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-41 PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

95 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL2 DATE: --02 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE OF MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SGxM HALL EFFECT SWITCH KITS (includes mounting hardware) CYLINDER BORE SIZE PART NO DESCRIPTION Hall PNP (with LED) m cable Hall NPN (with LED) m cable Hall PNP (with LED) m cable Hall NPN (with LED) m cable Hall PNP (with LED) m cable Hall NPN (with LED) m cable SPECIFICATIONS THROUGH OPERATING PRINCIPLE Hall Effect SWITCH CONFIGURATION Normally Open OUTPUT TYPE PNP/NPN MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS CURRENT 200mA MAXIMUM VOLTAGE 10-0 Volt VDC SWITCH INDICATOR LED MAXIMUM CLOSING FREQUENCY Approximately 1kHz MAXIMUM STARTING CURRENT 1. Amps HYSTERESIS Approximately.8mm OPERATING TEMP. -20 to 17 F ENVIRONMENTAL IP67 HOUSING MATERIAL Anodized Aluminum CONNECTION CABLE x.2mm 2 REED SWITCH KITS (includes mounting hardware) CYLINDER BORE SIZE PART NO DESCRIPTION Reed (with LED) m cable Reed (with LED) m cable Reed (with LED) m cable SPECIFICATIONS THROUGH OPERATING PRINCIPLE Magnetic Reed SWITCH CONFIGURATION Normally Open MAXIMUM CONTACT RATING Watts MAXIMUM VOLTAGE 20 Volts AC/DC MAXIMUM STARTING CURRENT 1. Amps HYSTERESIS Approximately.8 mm OPERATING TEMP. -20 to 17 F ENVIRONMENTAL IP6 HOUSING MATERIAL Anodized Aluminum 2mm - 40mm (mounting hardware included) RB RD Refer to Catalog 2002, Page D-9 RC RM BORE SIZE RB RC RD RM PNP MODELS MODEL , , BROWN BLACK LOAD BLUE HALL WIRING SCHEMATICS DC DC NPN MODELS MODEL , , BROWN BLACK LOAD BLUE DC DC REED WIRING SCHEMATICS MODEL , , NORMALLY OPEN LED BROWN WHITE FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

96 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SHP Revised SHP Slide Selection Data This bulletin addresses two catalog page changes to the Series SHP Slides. A dimensional change to the extend travel adjustment on size 08 is corrected in the following graph, found on page A-6 of Catalog In addition, PHD has enhanced the methodology to determine maximum payload capacity in the slide selection data on page A-7. All changes and additions are shaded. Refer to Catalog 2002, Page A-6. SIZE NOMINAL TRAVEL in mm EXTEND TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT in mm RETRACT TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT MIN. SHANK LENGTH in mm in mm SCREWDRIVER MAX. SHANK DIAMETER in mm SLIDE SELECTION There are three major factors to consider when selecting a slide: thrust capacity, allowable mass, and dynamic moment capacity. 1 THRUST CAPACITY Use the theoretical output table to determine if thrust is sufficient for the applied load. 2 MAXIMUM PAYLOAD CAPACITY All Series SHP Slides come standard with end of travel shock pads. However, these shock pads are limited in the amount of energy that they can dissipate. Therefore, the slides have a maximum payload limit. Use the allowable velocity graph to verify that the slide can carry the payload at the desired velocity. DYNAMIC MOMENT CAPACITY The Dynamic Moment Load SIZE DIRECTION RETRACT 08 EXTEND RETRACT EXTEND RETRACT EXTEND UNIT SHP08x20 SHP08x40 SHP12x20 SHP12x40 SHP 16x1 SHP16x SHP16x 20 psi [1.4 bar] 1.2 [.] 1.6 [7.1] 2.7 [12.0]. [1.6].4 [24.0] 6. [28.0] TRAVEL TIME THEORETICAL OUTPUT TABLE lb [N] 0 psi [2.1 bar] 1.8 [8.0] 2.4 [10.7] 4.0 [17.8]. [2.6] 8.1 [6.0] 9.4 [41.8] NOTES: 1) Travel time is in seconds from application of pressure. 2) Travel times relatively independent of pressure between 60 and 100 psi. 40 psi [2.8 bar] 2.4 [10.7].1 [1.8]. [2.6] 7.1 [1.6] 10.8 [48.0] 12. [.6] LOAD lb [N] [1.6]. [1.] [11.1] 2. [8.9] 2 [6.7] 1. [4.4] 1 [2.2] 0. OPERATING PRESSURE 60 psi [4.1 bar].6 [16.0] 4.7 [20.9] 8.0 [.6] 10.6 [47.1] 16.2 [72.0] 18.8 [8.6] 0 psi [.4 bar].0 [1.].9 [17.] 6.7 [29.8] 8.8 [9.1] 1. [60.0] 1.7 [69.8] 70 psi [4.8 bar] 4.2 [18.7]. [24.4] 9. [41.] 12.4 [.1] 18.9 [84.0] 22.0 [97.8] 80 psi [. bar] 4.8 [21.] 6. [28.0] 10.7 [47.6] 14.1 [62.7] 21.6 [96.0] 2.1 [111.6] 90 psi [6.2 bar].4 [24.0] 7.1 [1.6] 12.0 [.] 1.9 [70.7] 24. [108.0] 28.2 [12.] ALLOWABLE LOAD VS. VELOCITY 100 psi [6.9 bar] 6.0 [26.7] 7.9 [.1] 1. [9.1] 17.6 [78.2] 27.0 [120.0] 1.4 [19.6] [2] [76] [127] [178] [229] [279] [0] [81] [42] [48] [] VELOCITY IPS [mm/sec] SHP08 SHP12 SHP16 Refer to Catalog 2002, Page A-7 None FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

97 DATE: PAGE 1 OF TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL4 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SG Design Change To Series SG Slides PHD is in the process of phasing in certain sizes of our new design Series SG Slide based on inventory usage. Presently, PHD is converting new orders of the size 4 to the new design. It is anticipated all sizes will be converted within the next - weeks. Although the redesign provides for a drop-in replacement for existing slides, there are some issues that require review and qualification with existing customers who will be replacing their current design Series SG in the future. See the IMPORTANT NOTES section. ORDERING DATA: SERIES SG TO ORDER SPECIFY: Product, Series, Type, Design No., Size, Travel, and Options. PRODUCT S - Slide TYPE B - Standard linear ball bushing, standard shaft C - TC bushing, standard shaft D - TC bushing, oversize shaft SIZE - 19 mm bore cylinder with 8 mm shaft standard, 10 mm shaft oversize - 20 mm bore cylinder with 10 mm shaft standard, 12 mm shaft oversize - 2 mm bore cylinder with 12 mm shaft standard, 16 mm shaft oversize - 2 mm bore cylinder with 16 mm shaft standard, 20 mm shaft oversize - 40 mm bore cylinder with 20 mm shaft standard, 2 mm shaft oversize - 40 mm bore cylinder with 2 mm shaft standard, 0 mm shaft oversize MID-POSITION TRAVEL Specify for position units. Travel from retract position 1 to mid-position 2. DB - Cushion controls both direction (Standard in location 1 & ) DE - Cushion control extend only (Standard in location 1) DR - Cushion control retract only (Standard in location ) - Cylinder replacement only - Rodlok cylinder with locking device adaptor (Not available on size 1) DB - NPT ports (NPT-standard on imperial units BSPP-standard on metric units) EDE - Hall Effect magnetic piston (Available on size 1 only) DR H4 H47 L9 M H4 PB PE M PR U6 UBxx U7 E WITH CYLINDER OPTIONS WITH CYLINDER OPTIONS - Magnetic piston for use with PHD Miniature Reed and Magnetoresistive Switches (Magnetoresistive switches not available on size 1) - Port controls both directions (Standard locations are 1 &, not available on size 1) - Port control extend only (Standard in location 1, not available on size 1) - Port control retract only (Standard in location, not available on size 1) - Optional port locations Standard ports, cushion controls, and port controls are located in positions 1 &. Sizes 2 and use 10-2 [M] ports when combined with port controls on the same surface. WITHOUT CYLINDER OPTIONS H11- VDMA/ISO cylinder ready 2 and 40 mm bore H12 - ISO 642 cylinder ready 16, 20, and 2 mm bore -H11 and -H12 are available on design number 6 metric units only. S G B 2 x 6 x DB M PB E BB Q1 Z1 SERIES G - Gantry THREE POSITION UNIT E - position cylinder (specify only if needed) DESIGN NO. - Imperial - Metric NOTES: 1) All units are shock ready as standard. Shock absorber kits are ordered separately. See page D-2 for complete ordering information. 2) Shock absorber on retraction is not available with UB2x option (port position 2). ) Shock absorbers are not plated with -Z1 option. 4) Options -BB and -BR are not available with shock absorbers. 2 6 SLIDE SIZE SLIDE TRAVEL IMPERIAL UNITS 21-1" to 12" 22-1" to 12" 2-1" to 16" 24-1" to 20" 2-1" to 24" 26-1" to 6" Available in 1/4" increments. Total slide travel from retract position 1 to extend position. MODEL NUMBER SLIDE SIZE SLIDE TRAVEL METRIC UNITS 61-2 mm to 0 mm 62-2 mm to 0 mm 6-2 mm to 40 mm 64-2 mm to 10 mm 6-2 mm to 610 mm 66-2 mm to 91 mm Available in mm increments. Total slide travel from retract position 1 to extend position. INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHES DESCRIPTION DC Inductive Proximity Switch 8 mm Threaded Current Sinking (NPN) DC Inductive Proximity Switch 8 mm Threaded Current Sourcing (PNP) BB BE BR CB GX GY L4 L6 Q1 Z1 SHOCK ABSORBER KITS SLIDE MODEL SGxx1, SGxx2 SGxx SGxx4, SGxx, SGxx6 SLIDE OPTIONS - Shock Pad both directions - Shock Pad on extension - Shock Pad on retraction - Proximity Switch ready both ends* - Saddle mounting in position number 4 - Saddle mounting in position number 1 (Not available on sizes 1, 2, slides) - Lube fitting in saddle port position 2 and 4 - Lube fitting in saddle port position - Corrosion-resistant guide shafts (ends unplated) - Electroless nickel plated ferrous metal parts *Switches must be ordered separately. PHD SHOCK ABSORBER NO x x x Notify existing customers of this design change. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

98 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL4 DATE: PAGE 2 OF PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SG DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS Powered by PHD s full featured ISO compliant Series CV Cylinder, the CV provides exceptionally long life, high speed, and superb stopping capacity. Additionally, the cylinder allows selection of performance enhancing options including Hushcontrol, Rodlock, and position units. The Series CV Cylinder uses the robust Series 620 Reed and Solid State switches which mount into the cylinder s integral slots. Tierod mounted switch brackets are no longer needed providing cost and space savings. Locking screws that secure the travel adjustments have been enhanced by using a nonmarring urethane pad and stainless steel locking screw. Enhancement provides easier adjustment and securely locks the adjustment system. IMPORTANT NOTES The mounting pattern and location has not changed allowing drop in and bolt up to the old design. However, the CV cylinder is slightly longer in length and customer awareness of this is needed especially for replacement situations. (See enclosed chart.) With the exception of the size, the bore size, piston area is smaller than the old design unit creating a slight reduction in thrust capacity. (See enclosed chart.) In a minority of replacement situations, this could be an issue if the slide was originally sized on the borderline. Customer awareness is suggested for replacement applications. If a customer is purchasing a new design unit for a replacement of an existing Series SG which used the 170 switches, the customer will need to order the 620 switches to replace their existing switches. Contact PHD Customer Service for assistance as required. FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

99 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL4 DATE: PAGE OF PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SG B* + TRAVEL C L POSITION DETAIL FF* + SLIDE TOTAL TRAVEL + MID-POSITION TRAVEL EFFECTIVE PISTON AREA in 2 [mm 2 ] BORE EXTEND RETRACT B DIM FF DIM UNIT OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEW SGx [SGx62] [2.4] [20] [06] [14] [4] [264] [9] [8.] [14.] [174.] SGx [SGx6] [28.6] [2] [642] [491] [72] [412] [68.] [94.] [122] [186.] SGx [SGx64] [8.1] [2] [1140] [804] [944] [691] [114] [12] [19.] [24] SGx [SGx6] [8.1] [40] [1140] [127] [944] [106] [114] [12.] [19.] [24] SGx [SGx66] [0.8] [40] [2027] [127] [180] [106] [11.] [12.] [186] [24] FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

100 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: Slides PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SM Slides Series SM Slides - Accessories Page Missing from CAT06 The last page of the accessories was unintentionally removed from CAT06. This page contained data for the modular kits to attach Series STP Slides directly to Series SM Slides and the 8 mm Proximity Bracket & Target Kits. See the information below. MODULAR MOUNTING KITS Modular design of the Series SM slide body allows Series STP Rail Slides to bolt and dowel together without the need for a transition plate. See chart for slide compatibility and hardware kits required. Each kit contains 2 dowel pins and 4 SHCS to mount the units together. PHD recommends that a -J option (transitional fi t) be specifi ed with the slide ordering data to allow the units to dowel together properly. Both units have -J dowel hole option as shown. PRIMARY SMxx08 SMxx12 SMxx16 SMxx2 SMxx2 SECONDARY STPDx08 STPDx12 STPDx16 STPDx2 STPDx2 KIT NUMBERS IMPERIAL METRIC CONSULT PHD NOTE: CARRIAGE OF SERIES STP SLIDE MUST BE MOVED FORWARD TO ACCESS REAR MOUNTING HOLES IN SLIDE BODY 2X DOWEL PINS SERIES SM SLIDES 4X SHCS SERIES STP SLIDES PROXIMITY SWITCH BRACKET & TARGET KIT Each kit contains a bracket, target and hardware for mounting one 8 mm threaded proximity switch on a Series SMx Slide. Switches must be ordered separately. See Switches and Sensors section for detailed switch information. (KIT #7102) UNIT SIZE A in mm in B mm A TARGET BRACKET 8mm PROXIMITY SWITCH NOT INCLUDED IN KIT B.709 [18] PART NO. DESCRIPTION 8 mm Inductive Proximity Switch NPN with 2 meter Cable 8 mm Inductive Proximity Switch PNP with 2 meter Cable See Switches and Sensors section for switch details. Keep a copy of this bulletin in the Series SM Slide section of your CAT06, between pages 2-98 and If your customers are interested in SM Slides, make them aware of this page. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

101 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL6 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: Slides PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: C, T, R, and B Shock Absorber Availability on Classic Slides Effective 6/1/2010, PHD will no longer provide shock absorbers as part of the optional shock absorber kits for the following series of PHD Classic Slides: Series C Series T Series R Series B PHD will continue to offer the kits less the shock which typically includes the shock mounting bracket and hardware. Following is a specification chart to allow you to obtain the appropriate shock absorber for your customers. PHD Product PHD Kit Number (Shock NOT Included) PHD Kit Number (Shock Included) PHD Shock Number Shock Mfg Shock Mfg Part Number PHD Button Part Button Number Mfg Mfg Button Part Number BS Ace MC22 NA NA NA BS Ace MC600 NA NA NA BS Ace MC600 NA NA NA BS Ace MC600 NA NA NA BS Ace MA0 NA NA NA BS Ace A-/4 x 2 NA NA NA CB0 NA NA Ace MC7 or MC7- NA NA NA CB04 NA Ace MC Ace CB06 NA Ace MC Ace RS0 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA RS , 1220 NA Ace MA600 NA NA NA RS , NA Ace MA600 NA NA NA RS08 111, 1116 NA Ace MC600 NA NA NA RS , NA Ace MC600 NA NA NA RS , 1116 NA Ace MA0 NA NA NA TS , , Ace MA0 NA NA NA NA= Not Applicable Please contact PHD Customer Service for additional assistance if required. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

102 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 8400 ANGULAR All 8400 Series Angular Grippers now have a non-adjustable piston rod. This change started to appear in January of '90 and as of September '90, all units are being shipped with this revision. Prior to this change the customer could use the set screw in the end of the piston rod to adjust the jaw position of the gripper. All design "02" grippers contain this new piston rod and are no longer adjustable. This design change was instituted to eliminate rod breakage and improve the gripper quality. The new part numbers read: xxx, xxx, xxx. The "01" design is available for any customer who requires the adjustability. Key number, piston and rod assembly, has been redesigned and is not to be used for adjusting the jaw position. All customers using Series 8400 Angular Grippers should made aware of this change. Unless a specific request is made, all orders will continue to be shipped as an "02" design with non-adjustable gripper jaws. (Consult PHD for part number.) FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

103 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G2 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 8460 PARALLEL The mounting screws which attach the Hall Sensor to an Gripper have been changed. The button head cap screw was found to protrude past the bottom mounting surface. We have now changed to a standard socket head cap screw which has a smaller head, and have eliminated the mounting interference. This change took effect in December of 1990 and all stock was retrofitted with the new fasteners. NEW FASTENER BOTTOM MOUNTING SURFACE If you had any customers who complained about this problem you should make them aware of the solution. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

104 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 8460, 8470, 8480 Jaw pads should be in line and parallel, PHD holds tight tolerances on all associated parts in order to maintain a quality gripper, however, they are not perfect. The chart below shows how the jaw pad on each model may vary from being perfectly in line and parallel to each other. Angle: Offset: The angle each jaw pad may vary, positive or negative, off parallel with the rear mounting surface. Distance one jaw pad may vary from the other jaw pad. Angle Offset (Degrees) (Inches) Angle Offset Difference Rear Mounting Surface PHD will produce special grippers with less deviation by machining the jaw pad mounting surfaces after assembly. Customers purchasing standard grippers should be advised of these specifications so appropriate tooling can be designed. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

105 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G4 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS PAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SERIES 7900 Compact Switches for Series 7900 Grippers Series 7900 Angular and Parallel Grippers can now be outfitted with PHD 170 Compact Proximity Switches. The mounting kits shown in the table below are included in the magnetic option on page two of this bulletin. The switch mounting kits may be ordered separately to retro-fit Grippers in the field. These new kits and magnetic option will be available by February 1, GRIPPER MODEL SWITCH MOUNTING KIT 792x, 7960 English x, 7970 English x, 7980 English x, 7990 English x, 7962 Metric x, 7972 Metric x, 7982 Metric x, 7992 Metric 18 See page two of this bulletin for the proper magnet/bracket option on Series 7900 Grippers. Inform your Gripper customers of the availability of the low cost 170 Switches on Series 7900 Grippers. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

106 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G4 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS PAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SERIES 7900 Compact Switches for Series 7900 Grippers To order the proper bracket for 170 Switches, specify either - or -6 in the designated location in the product nomenclature. Switches must be ordered separately. DESIGN NO. PORT TYPE SEALS XXXX - XX - X X X MODEL OPTIONS X X X X - - Reed Magnet and Switch Bracket Kit for 170 Reed Switches -6 - Hall Magnet and Switch Bracket Kit for 170 Hall Effect Switches OPTION FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

107 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES 190 PARALLEL Hard To Find Jaw Screws Now Available PHD's smallest Series 190 Parallel Grippers (1906x-1-x002) contain -6 tapped holes in the jaws. The socket head cap screws for attachment of jaw tooling can be difficult to find. For this reason PHD is now offering these alloy steel screws as an accessory item to the 190 Gripper. Listed below are available screws with prices. Part Screw List Price No. Size Each x 1/4 $ x /8 $ x 1/2 $ Jaw Tooling Screws (Socket Head) 1906x-1-x002 Gripper Make sure your miniature gripper customers are aware of this convenient item. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

108 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G6 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPER PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 790, 791, 794, , 791, 794 and 7990 Now Pneumatic Only All PHD " Bore Grippers (listed above) are now limited to pneumatic service only, with a maximum pressure rating of 10 psi air. These grippers were previously rated for up to 70 psi hydraulic. It was found that the gripper body was not thick enough in the switch groove to support hydraulic pressures. Usage of these large grippers is fairly low and even fewer are used for hydraulics. Units without switch cavities are available through our custom products area. None required. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

109 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G7 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES 190 PARALLEL Revised 190 Parallel Gripper Jaw Dimension Shown below are revised dimensions for Series 190 parallel gripper jaws. The F dimension was shown wrong in Catalog 91 for the three smaller sizes. Catalog 91 A shows the two smaller sizes correct but the and models are shown at.00 instead of the correct F dimension of.7. This is an important dimension and should be corrected in any and all outstanding catalogs. MODEL NO. LETTER DIM A MIN A MAX AL MIN AL MAX B C D F G -6 X.18 DP 6-2 X.28 DP 8-2 X.2 DP X.8 DP H K L M O P Q 4-40 X.18 DP 6-2 X.22 DP 8-2 X.28 DP X.8 DP R S T W /2 1/8 1/8 /16 Y Z #4 #6 #8 #10 AA BB CC DD REVISED DIMENSIONS F M B SQ C JAW KEY DETAIL Inform your customers of this corrected catalog dimension. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

110 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G8 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: GRB GRIPPERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: GRB 21 & GRB 1 PHD Switches Not Available on Two Smallest Sizes Models GRBx21 and GRBx1 180 Angular Grippers are NOT available with PHD Model 60 Switches (Sensor option -2). PHD Catalog 9 is not clear regarding switch availability on these 180 Angular Grippers. The 60 Switches ARE available on the four larger sizes of the GRB Gripper line. Four mm round switches are available on all sizes of the GRB Gripper. TO ORDER SPECIFY: Product type, Series, Design Designation, Size, Jaw Variation, Design No., Sensor, Port Location, Jaw Rotation, and Seals. PRODUCT TYPE GR - Gripper SERIES B SIZE Bore -.00 Bore Bore Bore Bore Bore DESIGN NO PORT POSITIONS AND FLOW CONTROLS Port Position 1, Without Port Controls (Standard) Port Position 4, Without Flow Controls Port Position 4, with Flow Controls (Port Controls ) (Not available on sizes 2 and.) SEALS 1 - Buna-N GR B DESIGN DESIGNATION 1 - English 2 - English, Corrosion Resistant JAW VARIATION 1 - Non-Locking NOTE: Flow Controls are only available with ports in Position #4 on models GRBx41-GRBx71. SENSOR 0 - None 2 - Hall Effect Magnet on piston (For Series 60 Switches) Not available on GRBx21 & GRBx1 - Proximity Ready JAW ROTATION PER JAW 0-90, Standard PROXIMITY SWITCH MOUNTING KITS GRIPPER NO. GRBx21 GRBx1 GRBx41 GRBx1 GRBx61 GRBx71 KIT NO Proximity Ready option must be specified for use with Proximity Switch Mounting Kits. PROXIMITY SWITCHES 4 mm Round Current Sinking (NPN) 4 mm Round Current Sourcing (PNP) None required. FILE UNDER GRIPPER IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

111 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G9 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: 190 MINIATURE PARALLEL GRIPPERS DESIGN NUMBER CHANGE ON 190 MINIATURE PARALLEL GRIPPERS On August 1, 199 PHD started phasing in a revision to the English models of the Series 190 Miniature Parallel Gripper. This revision involves changing over some internal components and external fasteners to a metric specification. This change is being made as part of an overall cost reduction with new pricing that is effective September 1, 199. This design number change has no effect on the form, fit, or function of the Series 190 Grippers. Design 2 units will completely interchange with Design 1 units. PHD will publish a complete product release with catalog's pricing and parts list in September, 199. There are two types of accessory kits that are affected by the 190 Gripper Design change. New Proximity Switch Bracket and Target Kits, and Jaw Travel Adjustment Kits have metric fasteners to match the threads in the revised gripper body. As parts for Design 1 are depleted, PHD will automatically convert orders for grippers and the affected accessory kits to the new design and kit numbers. Page 2 of this Technical Data Bulliten contains new ordering data and new accessory kit numbers. None Required. PHD will automatically convert orders to the new units and kits. You may want to let your customers know, to minimize questions and confusion. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

112 DATE: PAGE 2 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G9 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: 190 MINIATURE PARALLEL GRIPPERS DESIGN NUMBER CHANGE ON 190 MINIATURE PARALLEL GRIPPERS TO ORDER SPECIFY: Model, Design No., Proximity Ready Options, Maximum Force, Spring Option, and Seals. See complete Gripper Product Guide for all available options and accessories. DESIGN NO. MAXIMUM FORCE 0 - Internal Grip - External Grip SEALS 1 - Buna-N MODELS JAW STYLE JAW STYLE 2 SHORT TRAVEL LONG TRAVEL PROXIMITY SWITCH READY OPTION 4 - Sensor Ready (Not available with Spring Option) - Proximity Switch Ready SPRING OPTIONS 0 - None 1 - Single Acting Close 2 - Single Acting Open MODEL PROXIMITY SWITCH BRACKET AND TARGET SWITCH PHD 80 SWITCH BRACKET AND TARGET KIT JAW TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT KIT 1906X 1907X 1908X 1909X OLD NUMBER NEW NUMBER OLD NUMBER NEW NUMBER OLD NUMBER NEW NUMBER FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

113 DATE: --97 PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G10 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: 190/191 MINIATURE PARALLEL GRIPPERS Spring Option Eliminated As stated in the Product Notification faxed on /4/97, premature spring failure has occurred in certain applications on the Series 190/191 size 6 gripper. PHD has aggressively tested for solutions to this situation in the interim. This research and testing has not produced a satisfactory outcome to where performance and life expectancy meets PHD standards. As a result, PHD has made the decision to eliminate the single acting and spring assist option on the 19x6x gripper effective May 2nd. Again this affects only the size 6 (smallest) gripper. PHD recommends that all customers consider the size 7 (19x7x) if the spring option is required. PHD Customer Service will be contacting distributors pertaining to any orders for this gripper currently in house. Additionally, future reprints of the catalog will reflect this change. Make note of this change to be able to inform your customers who may order this option in the future. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

114 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G11 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: GRD PARALLEL GRIPPERS Series GRD Jaw Dimensions Following are dimensional changes and method of calling out jaw opening and closing concerning Series GRD Grippers. Dimensions and notations highlighted (shaded) indicate revised data. These changes affect dimensional charts on pages 4,, 11, 12, 1, and 14 of Catalog GRD01. LETTER DIM. A1 close** A1 open** A2 close** A2 open** B C D E* G1 G2* G* G4 G G6 G7 H1 H2 J1 J2* in x.079 DP x.280 DP x.220 DP GRDx1 mm x 2.0 DP M x 0. x 6.0 DP 21. M x 0. x 6.0 DP in x.079 DP x.280 DP x.0 DP MODEL NO. GRDx41 GRDxx GRDx6x mm in mm in x 1.41 x 4.0 x 1.66 x 2.0 DP.082 DP 2.0 DP.087 DP M x x M4 x x x 6.0 DP.20 DP x 8.0 DP.80 DP M4 x x M x 0.8 1/4-20 x x 8.0 DP.7 DP x 10.0 DP.00 DP mm x 2.2 DP M x 0.8 x 10.0 DP 9.0 M6 x 1.0 x 12.0 DP NOTES: 1) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE mm 2) *TOLERANCE FOR DIMENSIONS: E = ±.00 [± 0.1] G2 = ±.0006 [± 0.01] G = ±.000 [± 0.007] J2 (BETWEEN DOWEL PIN HOLES) = ±.0008 [± 0.02] J6 = ±.000 [H7] J7 AND J8 = ±.0008 [± 0.02] ) CIRCLED NUMBERS INDICATE SURFACE POSITIONS ** JAW MOVEMENT NOTE: JAWS OPEN AND CLOSE DIMENSIONS REFLECT THE MINIMUM DIMENSIONS AT EITHER OPEN OR CLOSED POSITIONS. GRIPPER JAWS MAY OPEN.040 [1 mm] WIDER OR CLOSE.040 [1 mm] FURTHER THAN THE STATED DIMENSIONS. None FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

115 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G12 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 190/191 PARALLEL GRIPPERS Series 190/191 Jaw Dimensions Following are dimensional changes and method of calling out jaw opening and closing concerning Series 190/191 Grippers. Dimensions and notations highlighted (shaded) indicate revised data. These changes affect dimensional charts on pages 6-40, 6-41, 6-42, and 6-4 of Catalog 96. LETTER DIM. MODEL NUMBER 19x60 19x6 19x70 19x7 19x80 19x8 19x90 19x9 in mm in mm in mm in mm A CLOSE A OPEN B C D F G #4 M2. # M #8 H K L M O* P* Q 4-40 x M x 0. x 6-2 x M x 0. x 8-2 x NOTES:.19 DP 4. DP.22 DP 4. DP.28 DP 1) *TOLERANCE R.601BETWEEN 1. DOWEL PIN.681 HOLES IS 18.0 ±.0008 [± 0.02].78 2) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm JAWS OPEN AND CLOSE DIMENSIONS REFLECT THE MINIMUM DIMENSIONS AT BOTH OPEN AND CLOSED POSITIONS. GRIPPER JAWS MAY OPEN OR CLOSE.080 [2 mm] FURTHER THAN STATED DIMENSIONS M M4 x 0.7 x 6.0 DP # x.8 DP M M x 0.8 x 7. DP 22.0 LETTER DIM. A CLOSE A OPEN AL CLOSE* AL OPEN* B C D F G 19x61/62 19x66/67 in x.18 DP mm M2. x 0.4 x.0 DP 2. MODEL NUMBER 19x71/72 19x76/77 in mm x M x 0. x.28 DP 6.0 DP in x.2 DP NOTES: 1) *AL CLOSE & OPEN ARE FOR MODELS 19x62, 72, 82, 92, 67, 77, 87, & 97 2) **TOLERANCE BETWEEN DOWEL PIN HOLES IS ±.0008 [±0.02] ) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm JAWS OPEN AND CLOSE DIMENSIONS REFLECT THE MINIMUM DIMENSIONS AT BOTH OPEN AND CLOSED POSITIONS. GRIPPER JAWS MAY OPEN OR CLOSE.080 [2 mm] FURTHER THAN STATED DIMENSIONS. 19x81/82 19x86/87 mm M4 x 0.7 x 8.0 DP x91/92 19x96/97 in mm x M x 0.8 x.8 DP 10.0 DP None FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

116 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 4 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G1 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES EGP SERIES EGP GRIPPERS REVISED PERFORMANCE AND DIMENSIONAL DATA Following are revisions to catalog EGP02 performance and dimensional data regarding the Series EGP Grippers. Data highlighted (shaded) indicates revised information. These catalog changes will be reflected when the Series EGP catalog is reprinted later this year. SPECIFICATIONS EGP-xMx-7 EGP-xMx-8 JAW TRAVEL SHORT 0.17 in [4.4 mm] 0. in [7.6 mm] LONG 0.29 in [7. mm] (Jaw Style 2 only) 0. in [1. mm] (Jaw Style 2 only) GRIP FORCE See chart on page 9 MOTOR VOLTAGE 24-0 VDC INTERFACE MODULE 24-0 VDC SENSOR OPTIONS 6 mm Square Inductive or Hall Effect Proximity Switches GRIPPER CORDSET 2 or meter Cable INTERFACE MODULE CABLE 1 or meter Cable (ordered separately) WEIGHT 10.6 oz [00 g] 1.2 lb [40 g] JAW SEQUENCE TIME 170 millisecond [nom] 240 millisecond [nom] JAW REPEATABILITY ± 0.00 in [0.08 mm] Inform potential purchasers of Series EGP Grippers. PHD Customer Service will be qualifying orders received to ensure grip force changes will not affect the customer s application. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

117 DIMENSIONS: Emax SERIES EGP GRIPPER G1 PAGE 2 OF 4 JAW STYLE 1 LETTER DIM. A CLOSE A OPEN B C D E* F* G H J K L M N P R S T U V W Y AA BB CC DD EE* FF* GG in # /8 6-2 x.12 DP # EGP-xMG-7x mm M M x 0. x.2 DP M MODEL NO. in # /8 8-2 x.2 DP # EGP-xMG-8x mm M M4 x 0.7 x 6.0 DP M BB M INSTALLED CORDSET DETAIL GG U CORDSET EXITS GRIPPER IN DIRECTION SHOWN PIN CONNECTOR WITH M8 THREAD SEE PROXIMITY SWITCH OPTION PAGE FOR DETAIL. (SIZE 7 ONLY) 2X THRU DIA AND C BORE FOR AA SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW NOTES: 1) ALL METRIC DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS 1 mm = in 2) *TOLERANCE BETWEEN DOWEL PIN HOLES = ±.0008 [±.02 mm] ) JAWS OPEN AND CLOSE DIMENSIONS REFLECT THE MINIMUM DIMENSIONS AT BOTH OPEN AND CLOSE POSITIONS. GRIPPER JAWS MAY OPEN OR CLOSE.00 [.8 mm] FURTHER THAN STATED DIMENSIONS. H K L A SEE PROXIMITY SWITCH OPTION PAGE FOR DETAIL. (SIZE 8 ONLY) P 4X CLEARANCE HOLE FOR W DOWEL PIN SIZE 8 ONLY 2X THRU DIA EACH JAW FOR D SCREW 4X Y THREAD S S/2 N G C T B SQ R 1X Ø THRU EACH JAW FOR W DOWEL PIN E* (SIZE 7 ONLY) J F* V CC FF* DD EE* (SIZE 7 ONLY) All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced. PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

118 DIMENSIONS: Emax SERIES EGP GRIPPER G1 PAGE OF 4 JAW STYLE 2 LETTER DIM. A CLOSE* A OPEN* AL CLOSE* AL OPEN* B C D E** F** G H J K L M N P R S T U W Y AA BB CC DD EE** FF** GG in x.28 DP ± /8 6-2 x.12 DP # EGP-xMH-7 mm M x 0. x 6.0 DP ± M x 0. x.2 DP M MODEL NO. EGP-xMH-8 in mm x.2 DP M4 x 0.7 x 8.0 DP ± ± / x.2 DP M4 x 0.7 x 6.0 DP #8 M NOTES: 1) ALL METRIC DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS 1 mm = in 2) *A = mm jaw travel SIZE 7 AL = 9 mm jaw travel SIZE 7 8 mm jaw travel SIZE 8 14 mm jaw travel SIZE 8 ) **TOLERANCE BETWEEN DOWEL PIN HOLES = ±.0008 [±.02 mm] 4) JAWS OPEN AND CLOSE DIMENSIONS REFLECT THE MINIMUM DIMENSIONS AT BOTH OPEN AND CLOSE POSITIONS. GRIPPER JAWS MAY OPEN OR CLOSE.00 [.8 mm] FURTHER THAN STATED DIMENSIONS. BB M L K (P).079 [2.0] KEY EXTENSIVE INSTALLED CORDSET DETAIL GG U A AL CORDSET EXITS GRIPPER IN DIRECTION SHOWN PIN CONNECTOR WITH M8 THREAD SEE PROXIMITY SSWITCH OPTION PAGE FOR DETAIL. (SIZE 7 ONLY) 2X THRU DIA AND C BORE FOR AA SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW SEE PROXIMITY SWITCH OPTION PAGE FOR DETAIL. (SIZE 8 ONLY) 4X Y THREAD 4X CLEARANCE HOLE FOR W DOWEL PIN SIZE 8 ONLY.080 [2.0] PLUG HEIGHT G C B SQ E** (SIZE 7 ONLY) J F** CC 2X D THREAD EACH JAW S R P ±.000 [±.008 mm] N T FF** DD EE** (SIZE 7 ONLY) H All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced. PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

119 GRIP FORCE DIAGRAMS: SERIES EGP G1 PAGE 4 OF 4 TOOLING LENGTH LEGEND SHORT TRAVEL LONG TRAVEL DOUBLE ACTING 0 [12] EGP-xMx-7x and EGP-xMx-7x9 EGP-xMx-8x and EGP-xMx-8x9 TOTAL GRIP FORCE lbs [N] 2 [111] 20 [89] 1 [66] 10 [44] [22] SHORT JAW LONG JAW TOTAL GRIP FORCE lbs [N] 2 [111] 20 [89] 1 [66] 10 [44] [22] SHORT JAW LONG JAW [2] [0] [7] TOOLING LENGTH inches [mm] [2] [0] [7] [100] TOOLING LENGTH inches [mm] Size 8 is used when larger jaw travel is required. GRIP FORCE = PART WEIGHT x /DERATING FACTOR The part weight that grippers can handle will vary based on: size of part being picked up, shape of part, texture of part, speed at which part is transferred, shape of finger pads, etc. PHD recommends that the fingers or jaws be tooled or machined to conform to the shape of the part being gripped. When gripping compliant ( springy ) objects or objects that require alignment by the gripper fingers prior to actual gripping, expect the grip force to be reduced significantly. This is due to the dynamic nature of the internal driving mechanism. This may also cause peak or transient gripping forces to be higher than shown in the curves. * Gripping forces are the arithmetic sum of all forces occurring at gripper jaws. EXAMPLE: For the size 7 Series EGP Gripper, a weight of 2 lb needs to be carried 2 inches from the end plate. To calculate minimum grip force required, use the equation below. GRIP FORCE = 2 x /0.68 = 8.8 lb Therefore, the most cost effective model available would be the EGP-1MG-7x or EGP-1MH-7x. Be certain to review notes for additional information on grip force. NOTES: 1) The maximum tooling length for size 7 is in [76 mm]. The maximum tooling length for size 8 is 4 in [102 mm]. 2) lb can be substituted for [N] to calculate [N]. DERATING FACTOR GRIP FORCE DERATING GRAPH TOOLING LENGTH SIZES 7 & 8 SIZE [2] [0] [7] [100] TOOLING LENGTH inches [mm] Use the grip force charts above to determine the proper unit. PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

120 DATE: PAGE 1 OF TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G14 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: GRT PART EJECTOR/SPRING ASSIST ADDED TO SERIES GRTx1 Effective 7/14/00, PHD will offer Part Ejector and Spring Assist options on the new size 1 GRT Gripper released in Catalog 2K (page 6A-60). The following is updated information regarding dimensional, performance, and engineering data. Data highlighted (shaded) indicates new information to Catalog 2K. These additions will be added to Catalog TO ORDER, SPECIFY: Product Type, Series, Type, Style, Size, Jaw Style, Design No., Options, and Seals. PRODUCT TYPE G - Gripper TYPE T - Three jaw BORE SIZE 1-27 mm 2-40 mm - 0 mm 4-6 mm - 80 mm mm 7-12 mm mm DESIGN NO. OPTIONS 0 - None 1 - Part Ejector SEALS 1 - Buna-N 2 - Fluoro-Elastomer MODEL NUMBER GRTx12 GRTx22 GRTx2 GRTx42 GRTx2 GRTx62 GRTx72 GRTx82 FINGER BLANKS KIT NUMBER IMPERIAL METRIC G R T SERIES STYLE 1 - Imperial - Metric JAW STYLE 2 - Standard travel SENSOR OPTIONS 0 - None - Proximity switch ready (For internal switches) SPRING OPTIONS 0 - None HEAVY FORCE - Spring assist closed 6 - Spring assist open GRIPPER SIZE GRTx1, 2,, 4, & GRTx6, 7, & 8 INTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCHES SWITCH DESCRIPTION 4 mm Round NPN (Sink) 4 mm Round PNP (Source) 8 mm Threaded NPN (Sink) 8 mm Threaded PNP (Source) PART NO DIRECTION JAWS OPENING JAWS CLOSING GRTx1x GRTx2x INTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCH TARGET KITS KIT NUMBER GRTxx GRTx4x GRTxx GRTx6x Kit includes: 1 Proximity Target, 1 Proximity Adjustment Screw, 2 Target Adjustment Screws GRTx7x GRTx8x GRIPPER SIZE GRTx1, 2,, 4, & GRTx6, 7, & 8 EXTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCHES SWITCH DESCRIPTION 8 mm Threaded NPN (Sink) 8 mm Threaded PNP (Source) 12 mm Threaded NPN (Sink) 12 mm Threaded PNP (Source) 12 mm Threaded AC VAC PART NO GRTx1x EXTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKETS KIT NUMBER GRTx2x GRTxx GRTx4x GRTxx GRTx6x GRTx7x GRTx8x ! Options may affect unit length. See unit dimension and options pages for adders. PRODUCTS CUSTOM FIT FIT T O N EED CUSTOM GRIPPERS ARE AVAILABLE. PLEASE CONSULT PHD. Inform current and potential customers of Series GRT grippers of this update. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

121 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G14 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS PAGE 2 OF MODEL OR SERIES: GRT DIMENSIONS GRIP FORCE GRAPH LETTER DIM P1 P2 P P4 P P6 P7 P8 P9 MODEL NUMBER GRTx1x in mm M x Refer to Catalog A-6 TOTAL GRIP FORCE lb [N] 70 [11] 60 [267] 0 [222] 40 [178] 0 [1] 20 [89] 10 [4] AIR WITH HEAVY SPRING OPEN AIR WITH HEAVY SPRING CLOSED AIR ONLY OPEN AIR ONLY CLOSED HEAVY SPRING ONLY GRTx1x-1-xxxx [6] 0. [1] 0.7 [19] 1 [2] 1.2 [2] 1. [8] TOOLING LENGTH inch [mm] Refer to Catalog A-64 MODEL NO. GRTx1x GRTx2x GRTxx GRTx4x GRTxx GRTx6x GRTx7x GRTx8x MODEL NO. GRTx1x GRTx2x GRTxx GRTx4x GRTxx GRTx6x GRTx7x GRTx8x TOTAL DIAMETRAL JAW TRAVEL in mm TOTAL CLOSE GRIP FORCE AT 87 psi [6 bar] lb N GRIPPER WEIGHT lb kg CLOSE OR OPEN TIME 87 psi [6 bar] DISPLACEMENT sec in cm Minimum Operating Pressure is 0 psi [2 bar] for standard unit and 60 psi [4 bar] for spring assist unit. HEAVY SPRING SPECIFICATIONS SF SPRING GRIP FORCE WEIGHT CLOSE OR OPEN TIME 87 psi [6 bar] IN sec MINIMUM MAXIMUM ADDER with against spring MODEL lb N lb N lb kg spring spring only NO. GRTx1x GRTx2x GRTxx GRTx4x GRTxx GRTx6x GRTx7x GRTx8x Refer to Catalog A-6 TOOLING LENGTH MAXIMUM in FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER mm TOOLING WEIGHT MAX. PER JAW PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219) lb kg

122 DERATING FACTOR DATE: PAGE OF TOOLING LENGTH FACTOR CHART A GRTx1x GRTx2x 1 [2] 2 [1] GRTxx GRTx4x [76] GRTxx TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G14 4 [102] GRTx6x [127] GRTx7x PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: GRT 6 [12] 7 [178] GRTx8x 8 [20] MAX. ALLOWABLE FORCES & MOMENTS ON GRIPPER JAWS MODEL NO. GRTx1x GRTx2x GRTxx GRTx4x GRTxx GRTx6x GRTx7x GRTx8x TOOLING LENGTH inch [mm] Refer to Catalog A-66 Refer to Catalog A-66 lb Fa N OPEN Mx* in-lb Nm CLOSE Mx in-lb Nm My in-lb Nm Mz in-lb Nm HEAVY FORCE SPRING ASSIST LETTER DIM Ø B1 B2 Ø B9 MAX Ø B9 MIN C1 C2 C C4 K K4 K K7 K9 K10 P P6 Ø P7 Ø P8 P9 MODEL NUMBER GRTx1x in x.94 DP x.1 DP mm M4 x 0.7 x.94 DP.0 x.1 DP Refer to Catalog A-67 LETTER DIM B2 Ø EJ1 Ø EJ2 Ø EJ EJ4 EJ EJ6 EJ7 Ø EJ8 EJ9 EJ10 EJ11 EJ12 EJ1 EJ14 MODEL NUMBER GRTx1x in N/A.700 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A mm N/A 17.8 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A PART EJECTOR MODEL NO. GRTx1x GRTx2x GRTxx GRTx4x GRTxx GRTx6x GRTx7x GRTx8x Refer to Catalog A-70 GRIPPER MOUNTING KIT SPRING ASSIST UNIT KIT NUMBER FASTENER (SHCS) MODEL NUMBER GRT x 1-1/4 PART EJECTOR TOTAL SPRING FORCE lb N GRT M x 0. x 0 Refer to Catalog A-72 FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

123 DATE: PAGE 1 OF TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G1 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES GRB Design Change To Series GRB Grippers Effective November 22, 2002, PHD will be releasing a redesigned Series GRB Gripper. All orders received after this date will require conversion to the new design. Below is the new ordering data for the new 2 and 6 design plus a general overview of the major DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS. Although the redesign is a drop-in replacement for existing grippers, there are some issues that require review and qualification with existing customers who will be replacing their current design GRB in the future. See the IMPORTANT NOTES section on page 2 of. Also included is a conversion chart to assist you in converting from the old design to the equivalent new design model numbers. This chart includes the top 0 design 1 and Grippers sold during the past 2 years. See page of. ORDERING DATA: SERIES GRB, DESIGN 2 & 6 TO ORDER SPECIFY: Product, Series, Type, Jaw Variation, Jaw, Design No., Bore Size, Total Jaw Rotation, and Options required. SERIES R - Regular Duty JAW VARIATION 1 - Non-locking DESIGN NO. (See Note) 2 - Imperial 6 - Metric OPTIONS (OMIT IF NOT REQUIRED) PORTING OPTION UB1 - Port option in location 1 SWITCH OPTIONS CU - Proximity switch ready M - Magnet for Series 6790 Switches STANDARD PORT IN LOCATION 48 OPTION: PORTS IN LOCATION 1 G R B x UB1-M PART NUMBER PRODUCT G - Gripper TYPE B Angular JAW 1 - Style 1 NOTE: Design number dictates imperial or metric mounting holes, dowel pin holes, and ports. SERIES 6790 SOLID STATE & REED SWITCHES DESCRIPTION PNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) DC Reed, 4.-0 VDC, 2 Meter Cable PNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) DC Reed, 4.-0 VDC, Meter Cable NPN (Sink) Solid State, 4.-0 VDC, 2 Meter Cable NPN (Sink) Solid State, 4.-0 VDC, Meter Cable PNP (Source) Solid State, 4.-0 VDC, 2 Meter Cable PNP (Source) Solid State, 4.-0 VDC, Meter Cable PNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) DC Reed, 4.-0 VDC, Quick Connect NPN (Sink) Solid State, 4.-0 VDC, Quick Connect PNP (Source) Solid State, 4.-0 VDC, Quick Connect 2 Meter Cordset with Quick Connect Meter Cordset with Quick Connect 4 mm ROUND INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHES PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION NPN (Sink) 10-0 VDC, 2 meter cable PNP (Source) 10-0 VDC, 2 meter cable BORE SIZE Diameter mm (in) 12 (.472) 16 (.60) 20 (.787) 2 (1.260) 40 (1.7) 0 (1.969) PROXIMITY SWITCH MOUNTING KITS SIZE KIT NUMBER Each kit contains 1 target, 1 switch mounting bracket, and fasteners for mounting. Switches sold separately. TOTAL JAW ROTATION (DEGREES) 180 (Standard) IMPERIAL FLOW CONTROLS PORT SIZE 10-2 UNC-2B 10-2 UNC-2B 10-2 UNC-2B 1/8 NPT 1/8 NPT 1/8 NPT GRIPPER SIZE KIT NUMBER NOTE: EACH KIT CONTAINS 1 FLOW CONTROL GRIPPER SIZE METRIC FLOW CONTROLS PORT SIZE M x 0.8 M x 0.8 M x 0.8 1/8 BSP 1/8 BSP 1/8 BSP KIT NUMBER NOTE: EACH KIT CONTAINS 1 FLOW CONTROL Notify existing customers of this design change effective 11/22/02. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

124 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G1 DATE: PAGE 2 OF PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES GRB DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS Increased grip force Improved precision through decreased jaw side play Larger piston rod and jaw driver provide a significantly more rugged gripper One piece body provides superior interchangeability Internal speed restriction removes the need for external speed controls in standard applications Longer life seals Increased diameter jaw pivot pins, on the smaller sizes, provide for a more robust gripper Series 6790 Solid State and Reed switches now available on all sizes and provide a lower cost switch solution which fits within body slots Dowel pin holes added to jaws allow for simplified tooling and improved gripper interchangeability Proximity switches and kits are interchangeable between Design 1, [] and Design 2, [6] IMPORTANT NOTES The Design 2, [6] GRB is engineered to utilize PHD s Series 6790 Solid State and Reed switches. The Series 60 Hall Effect switches used on the Design 1, [] GRB WILL NOT work on the new design units. In the event that a Design 2, [6] GRB gripper is replacing a Design 1,[] GRB, the switches will need to be replaced. Because the Design 2, [6] GRB gripper utilizes Series 6790 switches, some minor dimensional changes to the size 12, 16, & 2 were required. Material has been added to the switch slot face of the gripper,.060 inch on the size 12,.040 inch on the size 16, and.060 inch on the size 2. This change DID NOT AFFECT the relationship between the mounting faces of the gripper body and the mounting holes in the jaws. Internal flow controls are no longer available. If a customer needs to reduce the jaw actuation speed, external flow controls may be purchased as accessories. The corrosion resistant option is no longer available. This option must now be purchased as a Custom Product. The 1, 60, & 7 jaw rotations (0, 120, & 10 total jaw rotation, respectively) are no longer available. If these rotations are necessary, they must be purchased as a Custom Product. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

125 DATE: PAGE OF SIZE 12 SIZE 16 SIZE 20 SIZE 2 SIZE 40 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G1 Design 1, [] Ordering Data GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB GRB PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES GRB GRB ORDERING DATA CONVERSION TABLE Equivalent Design 2, [6] Ordering Data GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180 GRB X 180-UB1 GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180 GRB X 60-CU GRB X 180 GRB X 60 GRB X 180 GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180 GRB X 180-UB1 GRB X 180-UB1-CU GRB X 180-CU GRB X 90-UB1-CU GRB X 90 GRB X 60-CU GRB X 60-CU-UB1 GRB X 180-UB1 GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180 GRB X 180-UB1 GRB X 180-M GRB X 60-M GRB X 90 GRB X 180-M GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180 GRB X 180-M GRB X 180-M-UB1 GRB X 180-UB1 GRB X 90-M GRB X 60 GRB X 180 GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180-CU-UB1 GRB X 180 GRB X 180-M GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180-M GRB X 180-M GRB X 180-M GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180 GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180-M GRB X 180-M GRB X 180-CU GRB X 180-CU Notes SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 60 SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 180 SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 60 SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 180 SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 60 SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTES 1 & SEE NOTE SEE NOTES 1 & SEE NOTE SEE NOTE SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTES 1 & 4, RECOMMEND 90 SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 60 SEE NOTE SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE SEE NOTES 1 & SEE NOTES 1 & 4, RECOMMEND 60 SEE NOTES 1 & 2 SEE NOTE 2 SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTES 1 & SEE NOTE SEE NOTES 2 & NOTES: 1) -M OPTION REQUIRES SERIES 6790 SWITCHES, EXISTING SWITCHES MUST BE REPLACED. 2) CORROSION RESISTANT IS NO LONGER OFFERED AS STANDARD, AND CAN BE MADE AS A CUSTOM PRODUCT. ) INTERNAL FLOW CONTROLS ARE NO LONGER AVAILABLE, EXTERNAL FLOW CONTROLS ARE AVAILABLE AS ACCESSORIES. 4) THIS JAW ROTATION IS NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS STANDARD. USE OTHER ROTATION OR ORDER AS CUSTOM PRODUCT. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

126 DATE: PAGE 1 OF TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G16 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES GRB SERIES GRB CORRECTED ENGINEERING DATA Various specifications and performance data has been inaccurately published in Catalog 200 for the Series GRB Grippers. Corrected information appears on the following pages. These replace pages 6B-6, 6B-8, 6B-9, and 6B-10 in Catalog 200. Corrected information and charts are highlighted (shaded). SPECIFICATIONS SIZE NOMINAL TOTAL JAW ROTATION GRIP FORCE FACTOR GF EXTERNAL GRIP INTERNAL GRIP Imperial Metric Imperial Metric GRIPPER WEIGHT lb kg CLOSE TIME 87 psi [6 bar] sec OPEN TIME 87 psi [6 bar] sec DISPLACEMENT in cm Refer to Catalog 200, Page 6B-6 GRIP FORCE CALCULATION EXAMPLE: PRESSURE (psi) x GF x FORCE MULTIPLIER = TOTAL GRIP FORCE (lb) DISTANCE FROM JAW PIVOT (in) PRESSURE [bar] x GF DISTANCE FROM JAW PIVOT [mm] x FORCE MULTIPLIER = TOTAL GRIP FORCE [N] JAW PIVOT Example: GRB x 180, [GRB x 180] Operating Pressure = 87 psi [6 bar] Find Tooling Length (Distance Between Jaw Pivot and Gripping Point): Desired tooling length is 1.7 in [44. mm]. Find Jaw Angle at Point of Grip: Jaws will be parallel (0 ) at point of grip. Determine Force Multipler Based on Jaw Angle at Point of Grip: Because jaws are parallel (0 ) at point of grip, force multiplier = 1 (from Force Multiplier Graph above). Find Grip Factor (GF) =.61 [994] (from Specifications p. 6) Total Grip Force = ((87 psi x.61) / 1.7) x 1 = 0. lb [((6 bar x 994) / 44.) x 1 = 14 N] PART F/2 F/2 F = Total Grip Force TOOLING LENGTH = 1.7 in [44. mm] Refer to Catalog 200, Page 6B-8 Ensure potential customers are aware of this correction to Catalog 200. FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

127 JAW TOOLING INERTIA GRAPHS (PER JAW) TOOLING INERTIA (lb-in 2 ) TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN: G16 PAGE 2 OF SIZE [6.6] 2.00 [.9] 1.7 [.1] 1.0 [4.4] 1.2 [.7] 1.00 [2.9].7 [2.2].0 [1.].2 [.7] 0 [0] CYCLE TIME (ms/90 ) TOOLING INERTIA [x 10-4 kg-m 2 ] JAW TOOLING Jaw tooling must be sized in such a manner as to keep the total jaw tooling inertia (per jaw) in the shaded areas of the charts below. Use the calculation example on page 10 as a template for your tooling design. Refer to Catalog 200, Page 6B-9 HA WA PART A LA HB WB LB TOOLING INERTIA (lb-in 2 ) SIZE 16 [8.0] [7.] [6.6] [.9] [.1] [4.4] [.7] [2.9] [2.2] [1.] [.7] 0 [0] CYCLE TIME (ms/90 ) TOOLING INERTIA [x 10-4 kg-m 2 ] AXIS Z1 AXIS Z2 AXIS Z (TOTAL JAW TOOLING INERTIA IS CALCULATED ABOUT THIS AXIS) R1 R2 PART B TOOLING INERTIA (lb-in 2 ) SIZE [26] [2] [21] [18] [1] [12] 0 [0] CYCLE TIME (ms/90 ) [8.8] [.9] [2.9] TOOLING INERTIA [x 10-4 kg-m 2 ] TOOLING INERTIA (lb-in 2 ) SIZE [44] [] [26] [18] [8.8] [0] CYCLE TIME (ms/90 ) TOOLING INERTIA [x 10-4 kg-m 2 ] TOOLING INERTIA (lb-in 2 ) SIZE [176] 0 [146] 40 [117] 0 [88] 20 [9] 10 [29] 0 [0] CYCLE TIME (ms/90 ) TOOLING INERTIA [x 10-4 kg-m 2 ] TOOLING INERTIA (lb-in 2 ) SIZE [0] CYCLE TIME (ms/90 ) FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260) [8] [27] [468] [410] [1] [29] [24] [176] [117] [9] TOOLING INERTIA [x 10-4 kg-m 2 ]

128 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN: G16 PAGE OF JAW TOOLING INERTIA CALCULATION (PER JAW) STEP 1: Determine the Gripper Size, Jaw Tooling Dimensions, and Gripper Opening Time. STEP 2: Calculate the moments of inertia for the Jaw Tooling. PART A AXIS Z1 AXIS Z2 AXIS Z (TOTAL JAW TOOLING INERTIA IS CALCULATED ABOUT THIS AXIS) R1 R2 Calculation of Jaw Tooling Mass: MA = LA x HA x WA x Mass Density of Jaw Tooling Material Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z1: IZ1 = (1/12) x (MA) x (HA 2 + LA 2 ) Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z: IZA = IZ1 + (MA x R1 2 ) PART B AXIS Z1 AXIS Z2 AXIS Z (TOTAL JAW TOOLING INERTIA IS CALCULATED ABOUT THIS AXIS) R1 R2 Calculation of Jaw Tooling Mass: MB = LB x HB x WB x Mass Density of Jaw Tooling Material Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z2: IZ2 = (1/12) x (MB) x (HB 2 + LB 2 ) Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z: IZB = IZ2 + (MB x R2 2 ) TOTAL JAW TOOLING INERTIA: ITOTAL = IZA + IZB STEP : Verify Jaw Tooling Inertia by comparing ITOTAL with Jaw Tooling Inertia graph. HA WA PART A LA HB WB LB PART B EXAMPLE: STEP 1: Gripper Size: 20, Jaw Tooling Dimensions: see graphic, Gripper Opening Time: 10 ms STEP 2: PART A LA =.00 in [.01 m] HA =.62 in [.016 m] WA =.70 in [.019 m] Mass Density of Aluminum =.098 lb/in [ kg/m ] R1 =.000 in [.07 m] Calculation of Jaw Tooling Mass: MA =.00 in x.62 in x.70 in x.098 lb/in [.01 m x.016 m x.019 m x kg/m ] MA =.02 lb [.011 kg] Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z1: IZ1 = (1/12) x (.02 lb) x (.62 2 in in) [(1/12) x (.011 kg) x ( m m)] IZ1 =.001 lb-in 2 [.9 x 10-7 kg-m 2 ] Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z: IZA =.001 lb-in 2 + (.02 lb x in) [.9 x 10-7 kg-m 2 + (.011 kg x.07 2 kg)] IZA =.208 lb-in 2 [6.2 x 10 - kg-m 2 ] PART B LB = 2.00 in [.064 m] HB =.0 in [.009 m] WB =.600 in [.01 m] Mass Density of Aluminum =.098 lb/in [ kg/m ] R2 = in [.01 m] Calculation of Jaw Tooling Mass: MB = 2.00 in x.0 in x.600 in x.098 lb/in [.064 m x.009 m x.01 m x kg/m ] MB =.01 lb [.02 kg] Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z2: IZ2 = (1/12) x (.01 lb) x (.0 2 in in) [(1/12) x (.02 kg) x ( m m)] IZ2 =.027 lb-in 2 [8.0 x 10-6 kg-m 2 ] Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z: IZB =.027 lb-in 2 + (.01 lb x in) [8.0 x 10-6 kg-m 2 + (.02 kg x.01 2 m)] IZB =.21 lb-in 2 [6.8 x 10 - kg-m 2 ] TOTAL JAW TOOLING INERTIA: ITOTAL =.208 lb-in lb-in 2 [6.2 x 10 - kg-m x 10 - kg-m 2 ] ITOTAL =.49 lb-in 2 [1. x 10-4 kg-m 2 ] STEP : FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260) TOOLING INERTIA (lb-in 2 ) ITOTAL Refer to Catalog 200, Page 6B-10 SIZE 20 [26] [2] [21] [18] [1] [12] [8.8] [.9] [2.9] 0 [0] CYCLE TIME (ms/90 ) TOOLING INERTIA [x 10-4 kg-m 2 ]

129 DATE: --0 PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G17 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES GRS & SERIES GRF New Switch Kit Numbers for Series GRS/GRF Grippers In March 200, performance inconsistencies with the Series 6790 switches were discovered on Series GRS and Series GRF Grippers. To address this issue, changes were made to the magnet to improve the performance of each style of 6790 switch. Following is a cross-reference guide for the new switch kits used in conjunction with Series GRS and Series GRF Gripper products. Series GRS Grippers Switch Kit Cross-Reference New Kit Number New Kit Number Gripper Size Old Kit Number for 6790 for 6790 REED Switches MR Switches (Solid State) Series GRF Gripper Switch Kit Cross-Reference New Kit Number New Kit Number Gripper Size Old Kit Number for 6790 for 6790 REED Switches MR Switches (Solid State) 19 KIT DID NOT CHANGE: USE Customers ordering Series GRS and Series GRF Grippers should be advised of the new switch kits available for 6790 Switches. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

130 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: REED SWITCHES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: AN12-6, 12, 20 AB , , 12 In June of 1990, PHD began molding some models of cylinder mounted proximity switches with a new 20% glass fiber filled compound. The purpose of this product change was to address several incidents in the field where Reed type switches had experienced failure. A percentage of these failures was attributed to excessive shrinkage of the plastic molded material. If shrinkage occurred it could potentially crack the glass encapsulated Reed switch. The switch models affected by this change are as follows: AN12-6, 12, or Watt Reed Switch with 6, 12, or 20 foot Cable AB Watt Reed Switch with Quick Connect ,12... Amp Reed Gated Triac with 6 or 12 foot Cable , Sink/Source Hall Effect Switch with 6 or 12 foot Cable Design number changes were not necessary since each product has a date code molded into the package. All products with a date code of 6/90 or later will be made of this new glass filled material. The old switches were transparent colored, but the new switches appear cloudy colored. Customers who experienced quality problems on these switches should be made aware of the improvement. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

131 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW2 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: HALL EFFECT MODEL It has recently come to our attention that there have been some problems in the field relating to the installation of PHD Hall Effect Switch model # The problem stems from the shield within the switch cable. Internally this shield should not come in contact with any of the cable conductors. However, in approximately 10% of models produced prior to 01/1/91, the possibility existed that the shield could contact the white wire. The white wire is the output of the switch, and as this unit is a sourcing type unit, if this shield were attached to ground, the output of the switch could become shorted causing the switch to either permanently or intermittently fail. In some instances the condition is not discovered unless the cable is flexed near the switch. In many applications the shield of switch cables is ignored and therefore this situation does not cause a problem. If you believe that you have experienced this problem or have this product installed on equipment where there is some immediate concern then we suggest that this condition be checked for. A simple power off continuity test with a buzz box or ohmmeter across the white wire and shield should tell. A GOOD unit should show NO continuity between the white wire and the shield. If you find that you do have some of these units in your possession, PHD will exchange them for current units where this problem has been corrected. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

132 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW PRODUCT TYPE: SENSORS &SET-POINT MODULES MODEL OR SERIES: HALL EFFECT, ALL SET-POINTS The PHD Set-Point Module with Hall Effect Sensors was first introduced in the Fall of '84. Since then, thousands of Gripper and Rotary Actuators with Sensor and Set-Point Module systems have been successfully implemented in the field. Occasionally there have been some systems installed that have proven to be less successful. The purpose of this Technical Data Bulletin is to inform the user of some of the pitfalls that can occur and how to avoid them. Description The PHD Set-Point Module is a very simple circuit employing a voltage regulator, a quad comparator, four trim pots, and four output transistors. The Set-Point Module is fairly temperature stable and exhibits very little drift of signal over a wide range of supply voltage fluctuations. The PHD Sensor is a Linear Output Hall Effect Transducer (LOHET) which is constructed on a ceramic substrate giving it extremely stable operating characteristics over fairly wide temperature ranges. Function The most common configuration of the system is on a PHD Gripper or Rotary Actuator. Typically a rotating member of these actuators will have a magnet affixed to it which in turn rotates at the face of the sensor. The magnet is constructed such that opposite poles will be presented to the sensor at each end of motion. The sensor will produce an increasing voltage as the polarity of the magnet changes from North to South. This signal is then conducted to the Set-Point Module through the Sensor cable. The Set-Point Module has four trimming potentiometer adjustments located on the side of the case. These pots are independent of one another and may be adjusted to coincide with the signal returned by the Sensor at any position of actuator travel. Once adjusted, the corresponding outputs and LED indicators will turn on whenever the Sensor signal has passed through the set point. Performance Factors Factors which can affect the performance of a PHD Sensor and Set-Point Module system are as follows: Mechanical Considerations Characterized by "crisp" transitions from off to on of the LED indicators, but Set-Points will appear to have drifted. 1. Variations in air pressure can cause tooling to flex. When this happens the magnet can actually pivot very slightly. This inconsistency can cause Set-Points to appear to drift. 2. Tooling attached to grippers may be moved during setups or as a result of a machine collision. If either of these situations occurs, then Set-Points should be readjusted.. Wear over time may take place on the tooling surfaces or in the gripper pivot pin bushings. As wear occurs the pivotal stopping positions of the magnet may change thereby causing Set-Points to change. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

133 DATE: PAGE 2 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW PRODUCT TYPE: SENSORS &SET-POINT MODULES MODEL OR SERIES: HALL EFFECT, ALL SET-POINTS Electrical Considerations Typically indicated by the lack of "crisp" on and off transitions of the LED indicators. 1. Sensor cables should always be isolated physically from other wiring such as servo or Stepper Motor cables and valve solenoid wiring. 2. The Set-Point Module uses an on-board voltage regulator circuit to supply voltage to the sensing system. Severe fluctuations of the DC supply to the Set-Point Module can cause inconsistent performance.. The Sensor cable includes a shield in contact with a groundable drain wire. This drain wire may be grounded to either machine ground or 0 Volts DC. There is no hard and fast rule as to which of these will yield the best shield for the signal. 4. If high electrical interference is present, it may be filtered with a resistor and capacitor network as shown in the schematic in figure 1. Initial values for R and C are shown. The only way to observe this interference is with an oscilloscope attached to the white and black wires of the sensor cable. A volt meter is not fast enough. Application Recommendations Although PHD Sensor and Set-Point Module systems are capable of some fairly fine discriminations, they are not recommended for applications of measuring parts. This is due to variations that will occur in parts and/or tooling based on fluctuations of operating pressures and temperatures. Suggested applications would be for inspection for presence of parts, i.e., signals to indicate when the gripper is open, closed on a part, or missed a part. Remember to allow for a fair amount of jaw travel to continue in the event of a missed part. If the tooling should restrict the amount of residual jaw travel after missing a part, then the system may have difficulty detecting this small additional travel. Additional applications would include those that require the sorting of parts that have a significant difference in physical size. Also applications that inspect for specific physical geometry on parts such as the presence of flats, hexes or significant difference in sizes of holes in parts. BLACK RED WHITE VDC SUPPLY R R = 70 OHM 1/4 WATT C = 22 MICRO FARRAD Figure 1 Schematic C + - Double check all future applications to make sure they conform to the criteria on this Technical Data Sheet. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219) VDC -0 VDC TRNS POS TRNS SIG A TRNS SIG B OUTPUT A1 OUTPUT A2 OUTPUT B1 OUTPUT B VDC SOURCE ONLY

134 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW4 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES MODEL OR SERIES: ALL PHD PROXIMITY SWITCHES Caution When Using Wire Ties Caution must be taken when using wire ties on PHD proximity switch cables. Crimping of the cable by extremely tight wire ties may cause the wire braids to break. The outer jacket may appear undamaged while the internal strain has severed the fine wire inside. This is especially true of the Model 1840-xxx-xx 4mm round and 1841-xxx-xx 6 mm square proximity switches. The solution is to use less tension when installing the wire ties and use additional shielding to protect the switch cable. The use of pneumatic tubing is ideal for protecting the cable while securing it with wire ties. Pneumatic Tubing Proximity Switch Cables Wire Tie INCORRECT CORRECT Inform your customers of this potential problem and of the easy solution shown above. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

135 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: AC REED SWITCHES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: AN12-6, AB12, , , AC Reed Switches Used with Allen Bradley Controllers In some applications, PHD AC type Reed Switches are failing where they are used as inputs to Allen Bradley Model SLC100, SLC 10, SLC 00, and SLC 01 controllers. This is due to the inrush current produced by the Allen Bradley controller which far exceeds the maximum limits of most PHD Reed Switches. These applications require the use of the PHD amp Reed Switch. It is recommended that any applications for the following PHD AC Reed Switches be qualified as to their specific use. AN12-6 Reed Switch AB12 Reed Switch with Quick Connect Compact Reed Switch Compact Reed Switch with Quick Connect Liquid Resistant Reed Switch The above switches may not work with Allen Bradley Model SLC 100, SLC 10, SLC 00, and SLC 01 controllers without additional current limiting protection. Qualify all AC Reed Switch applications and specify amp Reed Switches whenever possible. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

136 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW6 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: LIQUID RESISTANT REED SWITCHES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: LED Works On DC Sink Or Source Starting in April, all Liquid Resistant Reed Switches will contain a bipolar LED indicator that will work on both DC sink and source applications. The original design contained an LED indicator that only functioned when used in a current sourcing application. Shown below are schematics for wiring these switches in the DC sink and source modes. These improved switches will be shipped with new packers indicating the bipolar LED and proper wiring instructions. Bipolar LED emits a green light in the sinking circuit and a red light in the sourcing circuit Switch Wiring Schematic DC Application - Source Circuit + DC Pin Switch Wiring Schematic DC Application - Sink Circuit DC Pin 2 LOAD Pin LOAD Pin DC Pin 1 + DC Pin 1 None required. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

137 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW7 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: COMPACT PROXIMITY SWITCHES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: , AND 1729 Wattage Rating Change The power capacity rating on (plain) and 1729 (Quick Connect) current limiting Compact Proximity Switches has changed from 10 watt to 2. watt maximum. This revision is identified through a design number change. PART NUMBERS POWER CAPACITY OLD SWITCH WATT REVISED SWITCH WATT The will begin phasing into production around February 1, 199. The started shipping around December 1, PHD will automatically update orders to the revised switches as they are available. This change will have little effect on customer applications because higher watt applications are extremely rare. Suggest that any customers with requirements for 10 watt power capacities on AC service use 1701 or 1721 Compact Switches. (See Catalog 9 page 7-8) FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

138 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW8 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: MINIATURE PROXIMITY SWITCHES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: , and 629 Wattage Rating Change The power capacity rating on (plain) and (Quick Connect) current limiting Compact Proximity Switches has changed from 10 watt to 2. watt maximum. This revision is identified through a design number change. PART NUMBERS POWER CAPACITY OLD SWITCH WATT REVISED SWITCH WATT The & will begin phasing into production around March 1, 199. PHD will automatically update orders to the revised switches as they are available. This change will have little effect on customer applications because higher watt applications are extremely rare. Suggest that any customers with requirements for 10 watt power capacities on AC service use or 621 Compact Switches. (See Catalog Addendum SW0) FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

139 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW9 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: REED SWITCHES MODEL OR SERIES: ALL 170 COMPACT REED SWITCHES Solution for Faulty 170 Reed Switches Series 170 Reed Switches have been subject to sporadic and inconsistent failures over the past several months. PHD has identified and corrected the source for these sporadic switch failures. It was discovered that in some cases, the force exerted by the switch brackets was enough to bend or deflect the reed contained in the molded switch. Given the right circumstances, this deflection was enough to crack the reed causing premature switch failure. As of all Series 170 Reed Switches shipped from PHD, Inc., have a softer durometer O-ring which greatly reduces the force exerted on the switches and eliminates the premature switch failure. These revised switch assemblies are identified by a clipped corner on the switch label attached to the cable. These premature switch failures applied only to the following Series 170 Reed Switches. Series 170 Hall Effect Switches were NOT affected and have not experienced any abnormal failure rates. Softer Durometer O-ring Identified by clipped corner on tag. AFFECTED REED SWITCHES Part No. Color Description White Sink or Source Type VDC Blue AC Type VAC Green AC Type VAC with Current Limit White Sink or Source Type VDC, Quick Connect Blue AC Type VAC, Quick Connect Green AC Type VAC, Quick Connect with Current Limit Distributors should return any Series 170 Compact Reed Switch inventory to PHD for retrofit with the new softer O-rings. Inform any of your customers who may have experienced Series 170 Compact Reed Switch failures. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

140 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW10 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: REED SWITCHES MODEL OR SERIES: ALL 170 COMPACT REED SWITCHES Date Coding of Series 170 Solution Per Technical Data Bulletin SW9, PHD identified and corrected the problem with the Series 170 Reed Switches. Effective immediately, PHD is no longer clipping the corner of the tag to identify the inclusion of the softer Durometer O-ring. Identification of the corrected switches can now be made by the date code on the switch. (See below.) NOTE: This applies ONLY to the Series 170 Reed Switches. Series 170 Hall Effect Switches were not affected. Softer Durometer O-ring Date of 98 (8th week of 199) or later contains the o-ring solution. As necessary. All Series 170 Compact Reed Switches with either a clipped tag or a date code of 98 or later has the O-ring solution. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

141 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW11 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: HALL SWITCHES MODEL OR SERIES: 60 & 80 HALL EFFECT Transient Voltage Protection As part of PHD's continual product improvement, PHD has enhanced the Series 60 and 80 Hall Effect Switches by adding transient protection. This is accomplished by adding a zener diode to the switch which reduces potential damage as a result of voltage spikes. No design number change was necessary to reflect this improvement. This added feature is stated in Catalog 96. This enhancement is being phased into current inventory with an estimated completion date of AFFECTED SWITCHES PART NO COLOR Yellow Red Yellow Red SERIES 80 (HALL) DESCRIPTION NPN (Sink) VDC, 2 meter cable PNP (Source) VDC, 2 meter cable NPN (Sink) VDC, Quick Connect PNP (Source) VDC, Quick Connect PART NO COLOR Yellow Red Yellow Red SERIES 60 (HALL) DESCRIPTION NPN (Sink) VDC, 2 meter cable PNP (Source) VDC, 2 meter cable NPN (Sink) VDC, Quick Connect PNP (Source) VDC, Quick Connect Inform customers as necessary of this product improvement. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

142 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW12 DATE: --97 PRODUCT TYPE: REED SWITCHES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 170 & 60 REED SWITCHES Phase Out of 170 & 60 AC Switches Eliminating Series 60 Miniature & 170 Proximity Switches V.A.C Recommended Replacement Switch with Current Limiting Feature By taking this step, we will reduce the frequency of switch problems in the field by offering only the current limit model. No increase in price will be realized. As inventory is depleted, (current estimate is July/August 1997), PHD will automatically convert orders to the corresponding switches with current limiting. Inform affected customers of this upcoming change. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

143 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW1 DATE: 2/1/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES & SENSORS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: CN0-6 CN0-6 Switch Elimination Phd will cease manufacturing and sale of the CN0-6 proximity switch once current inventory is depleted. This is projected to occur by late summer of this year. Alternatives PHD recommends using the Series 170, 190, or AN12-6 normally open switches in place of the CN0-6. The CN0-6 switch was designed to be wired either normally open or normally closed to support the common practice of wiring directly to valves years ago. With today s PLC software and I/O technology, software changes can easily be done to accomodate the normally open PHD switches listed above. Inform any existing CN0-6 users of this change. FILE UNDER SWITCHES/SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

144 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW14 DATE: /9/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 620 Marks on Series 620 Switches Currently, PHD advertises the CE mark in association with our new Series 620 Switches on page 8-1 in Catalog 98. The CE mark (stands for Conformite Europeene) is used to indicate the marked product meets relevant requirements adopted by the European Council. Due to unanticipated delays in processing our application, the Series 620 Switches are currently unable to officially carry the CE marks. PHD fully anticipates this occurring by the end of June Until this time, PHD Customer Service will be qualifying each order received for these switches as to whether the CE mark was crucial in the customer's purchasing decision. None FILE UNDER SWITCHES/SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

145 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW1 DATE: 7/10/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES AND SENSORS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SEE BELOW Certification Effective June 1, 1998 PHD has received notification of acceptance that the majority of PHD's proximity switch product line has qualified to carry the CE mark. The CE mark (stands for Conformite Europeene) is used to indicate the marked product meets relevant requirements adopted by the European Council. Following is a complete listing of PHD switches that will carry the CE mark. TYPE: yy yy yy xx 60-1-yy yy yy xx yy 80-1-yy yy* * xx 60-1-yy yy *Applicable for 10 to 0 VDC operation only. xx is cable length (in feet) yy is cable length (in meters) Inform customers who require this certification. FILE UNDER SWITCHES AND SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

146 DATE: 9/2/98 PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW16 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES AND SENSORS MODEL OR SERIES: 60, 80, and 170 switches Revision to Male Quick Connect PHD s supplier of 8mm push-in male quick connect (available on the 170, 60, and 80 series switches) has notified us of impending changes. A more versatile dual purpose connector will be made available in the near future not only with the current push-in feature, but also with integral threads which creates a watertight connection. When using the push-in feature only, the connector is compatible with the existing (2 meter long) and ( meter long) PHD female cordsets. In this situation, the mating electrical connection is rated for an IP6 protection class against dust ingress and direct water spray contact. Alternatively, when used with the proper locking nut style female cordset, the mating electrical connection is rated for an IP68 protection class against immersion in liquid. Currently PHD does not offer this particular cordset, but plans to in the near future. There will be no effect in function, however, there is a slight dimensional change as a result of the threads being added. The new style will be provided in orders as inventory of the current style is depleted. This will occur over the next 1 to months. 80 REED AND HALL EFFECT [M8x1] CABLE x Ø.14 [.40] (.0 [141]) [102.0] [0.0].26 [6.0] SQ 170 REED Ø.200 [.1] [101.6] (.90 [142]) 4 TYP.29 [7.4] 170 HALL EFFECT Ø.200 [.1] [101.6] (.90 [142]) 4 TYP.29 [7.4] LED INDICATOR.47 [12.0] LED INDICATOR.44 [11.] [2.4] Ø.14 [.40] [M8x1] [8.2][4.2].20 [8.1].028 [.71] [2.4] Ø.14 [.40] [M8x1].29 [7.].10 [.8].20 [8.1] 60 REED.20 [8.1].460 [11.7].10 [.8].061 [1.].2 [8.].80 [14.7].126 [.2] [M8x1] (.90 [142]) Inform future users of the revision. CABLE x Ø.14 [.40] [102.0].290 [7.4].700 [17.8] 60 HALL EFFECT AND MAGNETORESISTIVE.20 [8.1].460 [11.7].10 [.8].061 [1.].2 [8.] [.2] [M8x1] (.90 [142]) CABLE x Ø.14 [.40] [102.0] A B [14.7] LETTER DIM. MODEL NO. A B & & [17.4].89 [22.7] [27.7] 1.00 [] FILE UNDER SWITCHES AND SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

147 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW17 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES MODEL OR SERIES: MODEL xx- BRACKET NEW STYLE SWITCH BRACKETS FOR USE WITH THE SERIES 170 SWITCHES As part of PHD s continual product improvement, PHD has introduced a more adaptable switch bracket. This bracket includes an integral cable strain relief and is manufactured from durable plastic. The new design bracket is available in four (4) sizes for use on /4", 1", 1-1/8", 1-/8", Series AV, Series HV cylinders and associated powered slides. The four new plastic brackets are completely interchangeable with the eight metal brackets they replace. This enhanced bracket is currently being phased into inventory as a running change. The complete transition is estimated to be complete by Spring of AFFECTED BRACKETS OLD BRACKET NEW BRACKET [.7] MAX [2.4] LED INDICATOR SWITCH BRACKET DOES NOT EXTEND BEYOND CYLINDER OUTLINE ON THIS SIDE.429 [10.9] MAX 7.00 [17.8] Inform customer as necessary of this product innovation and transition period. FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

148 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW18 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES MODEL OR SERIES: 649 CORDSETS 649-xx CORDSETS On approximately /10/00, PHD began substituting Series threaded quick connect cordsets for the previous on Series 60 and 80 switches. Previously, this cordset was available only on the Series 170 switches. Based on current inventory, cordsets will replace around 7/1/00. Below is a comparison between the cordsets. OLD SERIES 17 CORDSETS NEW SERIES 649 CORDSETS COMMENTS JACKET MATERIAL JACKET COLOR JACKET DIAMETER PVC GRAY.14" PUR (poly-urethane) BLACK.177" Poly-urethane has become more desirable in the industry We will now have some switches with gray pigtails and some with black. All cordsets will be black. Some new switch and cordset combinations might not fit through previously designed cable routings. Rare instances PRICE SAME SAME 649-xx CORDSETS WITH FEMALE QUICK CONNECT PIN 2/4 WIRE COLOR BLACK Ø.402 [10.2] PIN 1 WIRE COLOR BROWN PIN WIRE COLOR BLUE [4.8].689 [19.] BLACK CONNECTOR BLACK CABLE Ø.177 [4.] L MODEL NO LETTER DIM. L [2 m] [ m] Note: Pre-June '98 switches should not be used with the new 649 cordset as there is minimum retention using this combination. In the rare situation where your customer needs to replace a cordset used with a pre-june switch, PHD will replace the switch on a no-charge basis. Inform customers as required of this transition. FILE UNDER SWITCHES/SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

149 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW19 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 60 INCORRECT WIRING SCHEMATIC LABEL It has been discovered that the wiring schematic labels, which are attached to the lead cable of the following switches, were incorrectly printed This affects the above switches with the date codes of (November January 200). The wiring schematic is correct however in Catalog 200 as well as the packer, which is included in each switch shipment. Identifiable problems have been minimal as most users rely principally on the packer for reference when installing the switches. As of February 14, 200, all labels have been corrected. Below is a drawing of the previously incorrect labels and the correct labels for reference. INCORRECT LABELS PART NO AND 62 (SINK - NPN) INPUT VDC LOAD ma MAX FT. WAYNE, IN USA WITH 2 METER CABLE BLUE DC BLACK LOAD BROWN DC 62 WITH QUICK CONNECT HALL SWITCH HALL SWITCH PIN 1 PIN 2/4 LOAD PIN DC DC 1 2/4 MODEL NO (SINK-NPN) INPUT VDC LOAD - 20mA MAX HALL SWITCH BLUE BLACK BROWN LOAD DC DC CORRECT LABELS Communicate this bulletin to your customers who use these switches. FILE UNDER SWITCHES & SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

150 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW20 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES MODEL OR SERIES: xx-0 Brackets Metal Proximity Switch Mounting Brackets For Use With Series 170 Switches -1-0 thru -4-0 Brackets Due to market demand, PHD will again make available the through -4-0 metal switch mounting brackets in addition to the plastic composite brackets currently cataloged. For clarification, there are no fundamental performance issues with the plastic brackets. However, there are certain customers who simply prefer and want the metal brackets. PHD does not plan on cataloging the metal brackets. However, for those customers who demand to purchase the metal brackets, they are available as a standard order item. PHD will be stocking these brackets. Contact PHD Customer Service for large quantity delivery information..00 [12.7] MAX Part Numbers List Price $ $ $ $ [.] MAX LED INDICATOR [2.4] SERIES AV & HV NPG CYLINDERS BORE SIZE IMPERIAL / /8 1-/8 1-1/8 METRIC COMPACT SWITCH OPTIONAL: CABLE STRAIN RELIEF BRACKET SWITCH BRACKET DOES NOT EXTEND BEYOND CYLINDER OUTLINE ON THIS SIDE.690 [17.] SERIES 1000 & & 4000 ROTARY & MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS COMPACT SWITCH ROTARY SECTION PART NO STRAIN RELIEF KITS DESCRIPTION Strain Relief Kit for use with Compact Switch Brackets Communicate this bulletin to your customers who have requested these metal brackets. FILE UNDER SWITCHES & SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

151 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: A1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: ADAPTORS PAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: MINIATURE ADAPTORS All Miniature Adaptors will now have a keyway added to the rod or shaft mounting diameter. This was done due to customer demand or suggestion, because they would like to have a keyed orientation for lineup purposes, and to help keep the Adaptor tight on the shaft. BEFORE NOW Catalog 91 contains this new feature on Dimensional Page None. FILE UNDER AUTOMATION HARDWARE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

152 DIMENSIONS: MINIATURE ADAPTORS PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

153 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: A2 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: AUTOMATION HARDWARE PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: TRANSITION PLATES All Transition Plates have been or will be changed to have clear anodized aluminum instead of black anodized aluminum. This was done to provide a more aesthetically pleasing look that will blend with additional machining done to the plate instead of showing contrasts as on earlier produced transition plates. Changes began in January of 1991 and will be completed as stock runs out. FILE UNDER AUTOMATION HARDWARE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

154 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: A PRODUCT TYPE: TRANSITION PLATES, ADAPTORS MODEL OR SERIES: ALL New Finish on Adaptors and Transition Plates Starting immediately, PHD will be phasing in a new finish on all hub adaptors, miniature adaptors, and transition plates. The new vibratory polished finish is the same finish our customers are accustomed to on PHD Reed and Hall Switch Brackets. This process provides a very high polished appearance. The current clear or black anodized finish will be phased out as new stock comes in. The new finish will be more consistent because many of the drilled holes on the black plates are aluminum in color. For those customers who must have an anodized finish, PHD will offer anodizing as an option. (See page 2 for option call outs.) All future orders not specified for anodize will receive the new vibratory polished finish as the older anodized stock is phased out. Consult PHD for anodized pricing. See page 2 for ordering information for anodized models. MINIATURE ADAPTORS Consult Factory for ordering and pricing Miniature Adaptors with anodizing. Inform your customers who use adaptors and transition plates of this finish change. FILE UNDER AUTOMATION HARDWARE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

155 DATE: PAGE 2 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: A PRODUCT TYPE: TRANSITION PLATES, ADAPTORS MODEL OR SERIES: ALL New Finish on Adaptors and Transition Plates HUB ADAPTORS To order, specify Adaptor Number, Hole Pattern Orientation Number. (Hub Adaptor Kit includes all hardware to mount Component to Hub, and Hub to Shaft.) Reference Section 8 Catalog 91 ADAPTOR NUMBER Select proper number from the Matrix. 1 - Polished Aluminum Finish - Anodized Aluminum Finish HOLE PATTERN Relationship of the hole pattern centerline to centerline of the keyway. The pattern may be rotated clockwise in increments. -00 Hole pattern centerline is the same as the keyway -01 Hole pattern centerline, clockwise of keyway -02 Hole pattern centerline, 10 clockwise of keyway TRANSITION PLATES To order, specify Primary Unit Number, Secondary Unit Number and Mounting Position. Reference Section 8 Catalog 91 SECONDARY UNIT 4 Digit Unit Number T T PRIMARY UNIT MOUNTING POSITION 4 Digit Unit Number 1 - Mounting Position 1, Polished Aluminum Finish 2 - Mounting Position 2, Polished Aluminum Finish - Mounting Position, Polished Aluminum Finish 4 - Mounting Position 4, Polished Aluminum Finish - Mounting Position 1, Anodized Finish 6 - Mounting Position 2, Anodized Finish 7 - Mounting Position, Anodized Finish 8 - Mounting Position 4, Anodized Finish FILE UNDER AUTOMATION HARDWARE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

156 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: A4 PRODUCT TYPE: AUTOMATION HARDWARE MODEL OR SERIES: HUB ADAPTORS, MINIATURE ADAPTORS, AND TRANSITION PLATES New Adaptors and Transition Plates For New Products The PHD Catalog 91 shows a wide range of adaptors and transition plates, but does not cover many of the newer PHD products. PHD does, however, offer these adaptors and plates for bolting these new products together with other PHD products. It would be difficult and confusing to list all of the possible combinations on this Technical Data Bulletin. Listed on page two of this bulletin are products which are not covered in Section 8 of Catalog 91, but now have adaptors and transition plates available. Call PHD for specific hardware model number, dimensions, price, and availability. Call PHD whenever the need arises for non-cataloged transition plates, hub adaptors, or miniature adaptors. FILE UNDER AUTOMATION HARDWARE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

157 DATE: PAGE 2 OF 2 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: A4 PRODUCT TYPE: AUTOMATION HARDWARE MODEL OR SERIES: HUB ADAPTORS, MINIATURE ADAPTORS, AND TRANSITION PLATES New Adaptors and Transition Plates For New Products ESCAPEMENTS Model Transition Plate Code ROTARY ACTUATORS Model Transition Plate Code R800 GRIPPERS Model Transition Plate Code All Series Example: = 9060 Model Transition Plate Code All GRB & GRC... See Examples Examples: GRB = GB12 GRC = GC1 SLIDES Model Transition Plate Code Bx0x... B01 Bx10x... B101 Bx12x... B121 CxU0x... C01 CxU04x... C041 CxU06x... C061 Exx04x... E041 Exx06x... E061 NAV /4 Bore... N04 NAV 1-1/8 Bore... N118 SA01x... SA12 SA02x... SA22 SA0x... SA2 SA04x... SA42 SA06x... SA62 SB01x... SB12 SB02x... SB22 SB0x... SB2 SB04x... SB42 SB06x... SB62 Tx T082 FILE UNDER AUTOMATION HARDWARE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

158 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: A DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: STANCHION PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: x-xx & x-xx Stanchion Shaft Thru Hole Clarification PHD Catalog `9 calls out the through hole diameter on 1" stanchion shafts at.62". This thru hole diameter is actually.687". MODEL MODEL DIA THRU.687 DIA THRU Since the thru hole size is larger than cataloged, this should not cause any major problems. None required unless questioned by customer. FILE UNDER AUTOMATION HARDWARE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

159 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U1 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: ALL CYLINDERS ALL MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS N, T, R, B, AND U SLIDES All PHD Cylinders, Multi-motion Actuators, and Slides that incorporate Cylinders now contain 4 wrench flats on the piston rod. This applies to any rod end which formerly had only 2 wrench flats. This change was made to make it easier to hold onto the rod regardless of its orientation. It helps in the attachment of tooling and can be accessed much better in confined areas. This is called out starting in catalog 91. The change went into effect on products in October of FOUR WRENCH FLATS Use this feature as a selling point when presenting PHD Cylinders, Multi-Motion Actuators, and Powered Slides. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

160 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U2 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS, ROTARY ACTUATORS, MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: TANDEM The 1/4" tubing between the reservoir and the actuator was changed from vinyl to urethane. The vinyl tubing became brittle with age. Urethane tubing remains flexible and clear. This change was effective June 7, 1989 on all tandem products. Notify customers with tandems of this improvement. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

161 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS, ROTARY ACTUATORS, MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS, SLIDES, GRIPPERS, ESCAPEMENTS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL Temperature ratings for seals in PHD products have been published as -40 to 180 F. We have found that our standard seals do not perform well below -20 F. Therefore all actuators are now rated from -20 to 180 F. Special seals can extend this range and we will look at these on an application by application basis. Check with any customers with low temperature applications and make them aware of the -20 F minimum temperature limit. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

162 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U4 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: ALL PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL PHD has improved cushion and port control ball check retainer seals for all PHD products. In the past all ball check retainers used a lead gasket to seal between the retainer and the head or cap. Retainers on these units now use an 'O' ring type seal. This change went into effect in June of Seal kits contain both types of seals with instructions on use and installation. Some older models will not seal properly with the 'O' ring. The lead gasket may be substituted in these cases. Ball Retainer Assembly With "O" Ring With Gasket None. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

163 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U6 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: ALL PRODUCTS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SERIES Electroless Nickel Plating For years PHD has offered nickel chrome plating as an option on many of our products for corrosion resistance and for food/washdown applications. This plating has always been difficult to work with and inconsistent at best. We are now recommending that Electroless Nickel Plating be used in place of nickel chrome on all future orders. We will be calling the distributor whenever we receive any order with the 'Z' nickel chrome option. Advantages for this changeover are: A more consistent plating throughout all areas of the unit Rated at approximately 0 hours of salt spray Shorter deliveries than nickel chrome Lower cost than nickel chrome (Consult PHD for new pricing for nickel chrome 'Z' option) Electroless Nickel Plating will be designated as a 'Z1' option. Price will be the same as the past 'Z' nickel chrome option. Recommend electroless nickel plating for all future washdown and corrosion resistant applications. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

164 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U7 PRODUCT TYPE: TOM THUMB CYLINDERS ESCAPEMENTS ROTARY ACTUATORS MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS SLIDES MODEL OR SERIES: SEE LIST BELOW Improved Port Control Design Improvements have been made to Port Controls on some products (see list below) to improve adjustability and the ability to fine tune the cylinder or actuator speed. The Port Control needles now have a much finer pitch of 72 threads per inch compared to the old design which had 40 threads per inch. In the future we will be looking at upgrading the Port Control design on other products. Products With Improved Port Control Design Effective Date Series A, AV, HV; /4" Bore Cylinders... March 1, 1992 Series A, AV, HV; 1 and 1-1/8" Bore Cylinders... August 1, 1991 Series NP, NH; 1-1/8 and 1-/8" Bore Non-Rotating Rod Cylinders... August 1, Miniature Rotary Actuators... August 1, 1991 MA and MT Miniature Multi-Motion Actuators (Rotary Section)... August 1, 1991 Series 1000 and 2000 Rotary Actuators (Except Tandem Models)... August 1, 1991 Series 1000 and 2000 Multi-Motion Actuators (Rotary Section, Except Tandem Models)... August 1, 1991 All Series Z Escapements... August 1, 1991 Series R, T, U, B, and N Slides, Size March 1, 1992 Series R, T, U, B, and N Slides, Size August 1, 1991 All future Repair Kits will include this improved design. Inform your customers of the improved adjustability of PHD built-in Port Controls. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

165 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U8 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS/ROTARY ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: PNEUMATIC AND HYDRAULIC New Cushion and Port Control Springs The cushion and Port Control springs in the following units were changed to heavier springs in July 1989: Series EA and NEHG, 1-/8" bore Cylinders Series NEAG and NEHG, 1-/8" bore Cylinders Series A, AV, and HV, 1-/8" bore Medium Duty Cylinders Series EA and EH, 1-1/8" bore Cylinders Series NEAG and NEHG, 1-1/8" bore Cylinders through 6000 RXXA and RXXH Rotary Actuators 2000 RXR Tandem Rotary Actuators This change was required because of spring failures in hydraulic applications involving pressure spikes, and in some pneumatic applications with high speed cycling. In those applications the spring deformed around the ball; sometimes even breaking apart and being pulled into the cylinder bore. The new robust spring has a larger wire diameter and two inactive coils on each end to better support the ball. Notify customers who may have had this problem in the past. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

166 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U9 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS ROTARY ACTUATORS MULT-MOTION ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: HYDRAULIC UNITS WITH MAGNETIC PISTONS Hydraulic Pressure Ratings With Magnetic Pistons For years PHD has built hydraulic actuators with either the M or E magnetic piston option. This requires the maximum working pressure of some actuators to be decreased because aluminum or brass tubes are required with magnetic piston options. The chart below lists the maximum hydraulic working pressures for these units. UNIT DESCRIPTION MAX. OPERATING PRESSURE WITH E OR M MAGNETIC PISTON OPTION /4", 1-1/8", 1-/8" EH, ES, NEHG CYLINDERS 100 PSI 2" NEHG CYLINDERS 1100 PSI " NEHG CYLINDERS 00 PSI SERIES /6000 ROTARY ACTUATORS 1100 PSI SERIES 7/8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS 00 PSI SERIES /6000 MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS 1100 PSI SERIES 7/8000 MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS 00 PSI See current catalog for standard working pressure ratings and other pressure limitations. Use this Technical Data Bulletin as a reference for pressure ratings on future hydraulic/magnetic piston units. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

167 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U10 PRODUCT TYPE: HEAVY DUTY CYLINDERS NON-ROTATING ROD CYLINDERS MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: SEE LIST BELOW Improved Port Control Design Improvements have been made to Port Controls on the following list of products. This change improved the ability to fine tune the cylinder or actuator speed. These port control needles now have a much finer pitch of 72 threads per inch compared to the old design with 40 threads per inch. These improved port controls were phased in during 1992 with the last units changing over by September of This completes a change over of all PHD products to this improved design. All Series E and NE Cylinders. All linear sections of Series Multi-Motion Actuators. All linear sections of Miniature Multi-Motion Actuators. See Technical Data Bulletin C/U7 for information on other products with improved Port Controls. Inform your customers of the improved adjustability of PHD built-in Port Controls. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

168 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U11 PRODUCT TYPE: ALL PRODUCTS MODEL OR SERIES: ALL PNEUMATIC UNITS Non-Lubricated Air vs. Dry Air This Technical Bulletin is written to clarify the use of PHD Pneumatic Cylinders and Actuators with non-lubricated air. Unless otherwise stated, PHD products are lubricated for use with non-lubricated air. Units specified for dry air may have special requirements including a dry film lubrication or cleanroom specifications. These dry air service applications can be accomplished by PHD s Custom Products Group. Catalog '9 now specifies for use with non-lubricated air. No action required. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

169 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U12 PRODUCT TYPE: ALL PRODUCTS MODEL OR SERIES: ALL Temperature Limits Most standard PHD Actuators are rated for temperature limits between -20 to 180 F. Through the use of -V Viton seal option, the temperature limit could be raised to 400 F. Listed below are the exceptions to the 400 F maximum temperature limit on units with Viton seals: 1) Rotary and MMA units 20 degs. **** 2) Slides: Series T, B, U, R 180 degs. ** Series M, N, SD/SE 400 degs. Series S, SA/SB 180 degs. * Series C and E N/A ) Grippers: 8600, 7900, and degs degs. *** degs. * GRB 180 degs. * GRC 400 degs. 4) Options: All units with magnets or hall sensors -M, -E, -J, -H, etc. 180 degs. All units with shock pads or bumpers -B, -BR, -BC, etc. 180 degs. * = Temp rating due to Shock Pads ** = Temp rating due to Thomson Bearings *** = Temp rating due to Delrin Bearings **** = Temp rating due to Rotary Bearings No action required. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

170 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U1 PRODUCT TYPE: ALL PRODUCTS MODEL OR SERIES: ALL Chemicals Listed as Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) PHD is in compliance with government regulations on ODS. As a result, PHD is not required to label any of our products based on the final ruling published in the February 11, 199 Federal Register. In part it states that if your product(s) touch an ODS, you have to label them. If you do not use ODS s and incorporate products that have touched ODS s, you do not have to label your product(s). The following are excerpts from the final rule: Manufactured with a controlled substance means that the manufacturer of the product itself used a controlled substance directly in the product s manufacturing, but the product itself does not contain the controlled substance at the point of introduction into interstate commerce. The following situations are excluded from the meaning of the phrase manufactured with a controlled substance: (1) Where a product has not had physical contact with the controlled substance; CFR (m) That contact would have to follow conditions outlined in the Final Rule. Also note that: Each manufacturer or importer of a product incorporating another product to which (a)(), or, (b)(2) applies, that is purchased from another manufacturer or supplier, is not required to pass through and incorporate the labeling information that accompanies such incorporated product in a warning statement accompanying the manufacturer s or importer s finished product. 40 CFR (a) Since manufacturers do not have to pass through labeling, independent investigation of upstream suppliers is no longer necessary. Another section specifies duties of distributors and wholesalers, including: (a)requirement of compliance by wholesalers, distributors and retailers. All wholesalers, distributors and retailers of products or containers to which this subpart applies are required to pass through the labeling information that accompanies the product. (b)reliance on reasonable belief. The wholesaler, distributor or retailer of a product may rely on the labeling information that it receives with the product or container, and is not required to independently investigate whether the requirements of this subpart are applicable to the product or container, as long as the wholesaler, distributor or retailer reasonably believes that the supplier of the product or container is reliably and accurately complying with the requirements of this subpart. 40 CFR No action required. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

171 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U 14 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES 7000 & 8000 Spiralox Retaining Rings on Series 7000 & 8000 Rotary Actuators and Multi-Motion Actuators When current stock is depleted, PHD will begin replacing the current Truarc (pt.# ) bearing retaining rings with a Spiralox (pt.# ) ring. This change affects only the Series 7000 & 8000 Rotary Actuators and Multi-Motion Actuators. Future parts list will reflect this change. Replacing Truarc type bearing retaining ring with Spiralox on Series 7000 & 8000 Rotary Actuators and Multi-Motion Actuators None FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

172 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U1 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS, SLIDES, MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: VARIOUS Seal Specification Change On May 17, 2001, PHD Inc. mailed a letter of notification to all PHD Distributors regarding potential premature seal failure problems on certain Series AV Cylinders. As stated in this letter, PHD was in process of changing the seal specification to a wax-filled carboxylated nitrile seal. Subsequent testing has proven such favorable results, PHD has widened the scope of products to use this new seal. Effective September 2001 all shipments of the following products will use the new wax-filled carboxylated nitrile seal: PISTON BORE / SIZE SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGED /4" A, AV, HV Piston and Rod Seals /4" EA, EL, EH, ES Piston and Rod Seals /4" NPG, NHG Piston and Rod Seals /4" NA, NAV, NHV, NTD Piston and Rod Seals Size 22 SD / SE Piston and Rod Seals Size 1 SK / SL ( LSV Design ) Piston Seals Only Size 0x TS, TH, TT Piston and Rod Seals Size 0x RS, RH, RT Piston and Rod Seals Size 0x BS, BH, BT Piston and Rod Seals Size 11, 1 SG ( LSV Design ) Piston Seals Only Size 0 MS, MT Piston and Rod Seals /4" MA1, MH1 Linear Section Only Piston and Rod Seals PISTON BORE / SIZE SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGED 1" A, AV, HV Piston and Rod Seals Size 2 SD / SE Piston and Rod Seals Size 2 SK / SL ( LSV Design ) Piston Seals Only Size 12, 2 SG ( LSV Design ) Piston Seals Only Size 04 MS, MT Piston and Rod Seals PISTON BORE / SIZE SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGED 1 1/8" A, AV, HV Piston and Rod Seals 1 1/8" EA, EL, EH, ES Piston and Rod Seals 1 1/8" NPG, NHG Piston and Rod Seals 1 1/8" NEAG, NEHG Piston and Rod Seals 1 1/8" NA, NAV, NHV, NTD Piston and Rod Seals Notify effected customers of this improvement. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

173 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U1 DATE: PAGE 2 OF 2 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS, SLIDES, MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS MODEL OR SERIES: VARIOUS PISTON BORE / SIZE SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGED Size 24 SD / SE Piston and Rod Seals Size SK / SL ( LSV Design ) Piston and Rod Seals Size 04x TS, TH, TT Piston and Rod Seals Size 04x RS, RH, RT Piston and Rod Seals Size 04x BS, BH, BT Piston and Rod Seals Size 1, SG ( LSV Design ) Piston and Rod Seals 1000 / 2000 MMA, MMH Linear Section Only Piston and Rod Seals PISTON BORE / SIZE SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGED 1 /8" A, AV, HV Piston and Rod Seals 1 /8" EA, EL, EH, ES Piston and Rod Seals 1 /8" NPG, NHG Piston and Rod Seals 1 /8" NEAG, NEHG Piston and Rod Seals Size 2 SD / SE Piston and Rod Seals Size 06x TS, TH, TT Piston and Rod Seals Size 06x RS, RH, RT Piston and Rod Seals Size 06x BS, BH, BT Piston and Rod Seals Size 06 MS, MT Piston and Rod Seals 000 / 4000 MMA, MMH Linear Section Only Piston and Rod Seals Size 08x BS, BH, BT Piston and Rod Seals Size 08x RS, RH, RT Piston and Rod Seals MISC. ITEMS SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGED Size 02x MS, MT Piston and Rod Seals Size 26 SD / SE Rod Seal Only Size 02x SA / SB Rod Seal Only Size 0x SA / SB Rod Seal Only FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (219) Fax (219)

174 DATE: TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U16 PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION & ROTARY ACTUATORS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: RxxH 000 & 6000, MxxH 000 & 6000 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE RATING CHANGE ON SERIES 000 & 6000 MULTI-MOTION & ROTARY ACTUATORS PHD, Inc. has determined it necessary to re-rate the maximum pressure rating of 2" bore rotary and multi-motion actuators for hydraulic service. Below are the specification changes highlighted (shaded). These changes will appear in Catalog Catalog 200, Page C-29 Catalog 200, Page 4A-22 RATINGS All pneumatic rotary actuators have a maximum pressure rating of 10 psi [10 bar] air. Most hydraulic rotary actuators have a maximum pressure rating of 100 psi [100 bar]. Except as noted in chart below.* HYD OPTION psi [bar] SERIES *PLAIN -P -D -E OR -M [69] 70 [2] 70 [2] [2] 70 [2] [2] [2] 70 [2] 70 [2] [] [2] 70 [2] 00 [] Minimum factor of safety at maximum rated hydraulic pressure for output shaft is 2:1, and for hydraulic chambers is :1. Consult PHD for proof pressure data. NOTE: All maximum working pressures are based on non-shock hydraulic service and should not exceed the recommended ratings. RATINGS All pneumatic multi-motion actuators have a maximum pressure rating of 10 psi [10 bar] air. Most hydraulic multi-motion actuators* have a maximum pressure rating of 100 psi [100 bar]. Pressure rating exceptions are as indicated. NOTE: All maximum working pressures are based on non-shock hydraulic service and should not exceed the recommended ratings. ROTARY SECTION OPTION psi [bar] SERIES PLAIN -P -D -E OR -M [69] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [] [2] [2] [] Ensure future customers are aware of this specification change. FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

175 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U17 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: CATALOG 0 UPDATES MODEL OR SERIES: VARIOUS Included are a number of changes for CATO. Below is a list of affected pages and descriptions of changes. Changes are highlighted in yellow on the following six pages. These changes have also been made to the online Catalog 200. PAGE SERIES/PRODUCT CHANGES AFFECT 1-4 CV Cylinders Mounting Accessory - Rectangular Flange Mounting Kit -61 Metric Rotary Actuators Dimensional and Quick Reference charts -7 Metric Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators Dimensional and Quick Reference charts -84 Position Rotary Actuators Dimensional and Quick Reference charts -8 Metric Position Rotary Actuators Dimensional and Quick Reference charts Multi-Motion Actuators Specifications chart Multi-Motion Actuators Dimensional chart 6-7 Metric Multi-Motion Actuators Dimensional chart Multi-Position Multi-Motion Actuators Specifications chart 1-8 CV Cylinders -H47 Rodlok option dimensions E & G 2-68 SK/SL Slides -H47 Rodlok option dimensions E & G 2-8 SCV Slides -H47 Rodlok option dimensions E & G SG Slides -H47 Rodlok option dimensions E & G 10-2 Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations Plate Thicknesses for Series SFP Slide & Rotary Actuators Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations Plate Thicknesses for Series SFP Slide & Grippers 10-1 Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations Plate Thicknesses for Series SFP Slide & other Slides Make note of these corrections in your Catalog 0 for future orders. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

176 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN C/U CATALOG 0 UPDATES Page 2 of 7 Page 1-4 Series CV Cylinder, Location of ZB + Stroke Dimension Dimension ZB + Stroke is currently dimensioned to the edge of the cap, but should be dimensioned to the end of the boss hidden in the flange. This is similar to the detail for the 2 through 100 bores at the bottom of page 1-4. RECTANGULAR FLANGE MOUNTING KIT SIZES 20 & 2 mm (MF8 PER ISO 642) UF TF ZF + STROKE MF TG1 SQ d1 HOLE THRU UR OPTIONAL M22 JAM NUT 2X HOLE THRU FOR FB FASTENER W ±.0 [±1.4] MF ZB + STROKE OPTIONAL 4X FD SHCS Page -61 Metric Rotary Actuators, Changes to Dimensions Y & ZA and Quick Reference Note CAP STYLE CAP STYLE PLAIN -A BOTH BOTH BOTH SERIES 1000 & & & & & 8000 A B C L SHAFTS* W x 1.9 x 16 x 1.9 x 16 7 x 2.6 x 8 x.18 x 8 x 2.6 x 78 V 12.00/ / / / /4.96 METRIC SHAFTS* W 4 x 2. x 1 4 x 2. x 1 6 x. x 2 8 x x x x 6 X 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 /8 Y Z ZA SERIES *1000 & & & & 8000 QUICK REFERENCE FOR: A + (T x B) DEGREE OF ROTATION *Add 6. to dimensions for each angle adjustment for Series 1000 & 2000 only Page -7 Metric Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators, Changes to Cap Style and Quick Reference Note CAP STYLE CAP STYLE PLAIN -A BOTH BOTH BOTH PLAIN -A BOTH BOTH BOTH SERIES A B C D E * BOTH IMPERIAL AND METRIC SHAFT OPTI (IMPERIAL SHAFT = DESIGN 8, AND METR NUMBERS FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN SERIES ** QUICK REFERENCE FOR: A + (T x B) DEGREE OF ROTATION **Add 6. to dimensions for each angle adjustment for Series 2000 only. Page -84 Position Rotary Actuators, Changes to Quick Reference Note SERIES * QUICK REFERENCE FOR: A + (T x B) DEGREE OF ROTATION *Add.20 to dimensions for each angle adjustment for Series 2000 only. Page -8 Metric Position Rotary Actuators, Changes to Dimensions Y, Z, & ZA and Quick Reference Note AFTS* W x 1.9 x 16 x 1.9 x 16 x 2.6 x 8 x.18 x 8 x 2.6 x 78 SERIES * METRIC SHAFTS* V 12.00/ / / / /4.96 W 4 x 2. x 1 4 x 2. x 1 6 x. x 2 8 x x x x 6 X G1/8 G1/8 G1/4 G1/4 G/8 Y QUICK REFERENCE FOR: A + (T x B) DEGREE OF ROTATION Z ZA *Add 6. to dimensions for each angle adjustment for Series 2000 only.

177 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN C/U CATALOG 0 UPDATES Page of 7 Page Multi-Motion Actuators, Change to Hydraulic Pressure Ratings for the Rotary Section, Series 000 & 6000 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE RATINGS FOR OPTIONS SERIES PLAIN psi bar Note: = Standard Rating ROTARY SECTION OPTION psi [bar] PORT CONTROLS -Dx psi bar psi bar E or -M psi bar SERIES PLAIN psi bar LINEAR SECTION OPTION psi [bar] PORT CONTROLS -Dx psi bar psi bar N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A -E or -M psi bar Page Multi-Motion Actuators, Change to Plain & -A Cap Style, Series 1000 & 2000 Page 6-7 Metric Multi-Motion Actuators, Change to Plain Cap Style, Series 2000 CAP STYLE PLAIN -A BOTH BOTH BOTH SERIES & & & & 8000 SERIES & 2000 A B C D CAP STYLE PLAIN -A BOTH BOTH BOTH SERIES & & & & 8000 SERIES 2000 A B C D Page Multi-Position Multi-Motion Actuators, Change to Hydraulic Pressure Ratings SPECIFICATIONS PNEUMATIC OPERATING PRESSURE HYDRAULIC OPERATING PRESSURE* OPERATING TEMPERATURE ROTATIONAL TOLERANCE STROKE TOLERANCE END OF ROTATION BACKLASH LUBRICATION MAINTENANCE SERIES to 10 psi [1.4 to 10 bar] 40 to 100 psi [2.8 to 10 bar] -20 to 180 F [-29 to 82 C] Nominal rotation +10 to -0 ±.01 [.8 mm] 2 (2000), 1 0' (4000) 1 0' (6000), 0 0' (8000) Factory lubricated for rated life Field repairable *SEE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE RATINGS FOR OPTIONS CHART BELOW. ALL HYDRAULIC RATINGS ARE BASED ON NON-SHOCK SERVICE. HYDRAULIC PRESSURE RATINGS FOR OPTIONS All pneumatic actuators have a maximum pressure rating of 10 psi [10 bar] air. Most hydraulic actuators have a maximum pressure rating of 100 psi [100 bar], except as noted in the chart. HYD SERIES ROTARY SECTION OPTION psi [bar] -P -D -E or -M [2] [] SERIES PLAIN psi bar NOTE: = STANDARD RATING LINEAR SECTION OPTION psi [bar] PORT CONTROLS -Dx psi bar psi bar N/A N/A N/A N/A -E or -M psi bar

178 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN C/U CATALOG 0 UPDATES Page 4 of 7 Changes to Rodlok dimensions. The redesigned 2 mm bore Rodlok incorporates a larger piston and port in the lock. This increases the size of the unit (dim. E) and the port (dim. G). Affects four pages: 1-8, 2-68, 2-8, and Pages 1-8 Series CV Cylinders LETTER DIM A1 A2 A A4 B C D1 D2 D DK E F F2 G1 G2 G H1 L1 L L L6 L7 L8 L10 L11 WH 20 mm in mm M22 x M4 x 0.7 x 20 M4 x 0.7 M mm in mm M22 x M4 x 0.7 x 20 M4 x 0.7 M BORE SIZE 2 mm 40 mm 0 mm 6 mm 80 mm 100 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm M6 x 1 x 20 M6 x 1 M G 1/ M6 x 1 x 20 M6 x 1 M G 1/ M8 x 1.2 x 0 M8 x 1.2 M6 G 1/ M8 x 1.2 x 0 M8 x 1.2 M8 G 1/ M10 x 1. x 0 M10 x 1. M8 G 1/ M10 x 1. x 0 M10 x 1. M8 G 1/ Pages 2-68 Series SK/SL Slides Pages Series SG Slides LETTER DIM. H E G L L8 AA Sxx72 mm M Sxx7 mm M MODEL NUMBER Sxx74 mm G 1/ Sxx7 mm G 1/ Sxx76 mm G 1/ LETTER DIM PHD BORE B E G H L L6 FF SGx [20] [12.] [20.] 10-2 [M] 1. [9.] 1.7 [40] 1.08 [27.] 8.44 [214.] MODEL NUMBER SGx2 SGx24 SGx [2] [2] [40] [18.] [171] [187.] [20.] [2.0] [27.7] /8 1/8 [M] [G 1/8] [G 1/8] [7] [4.] [46] [44] [48] [] [.] [41] [42.] [20.] [282] [09] SGx [40] 7.82 [187.] [27.7] 1/8 [G 1/8] 1.72 [44] 2.16 [] 1.67 [42.] [09] NOTES: 1) L Dim is the amount added to the standard unit for the H47 option 2) Numbers in [ ] are for metric units and are in mm. Pages 2-8 Series SCV Slides LETTER DIM H E G L L8 AA MODEL NUMBER SCVx2 SCVx SCVx4 SCVx SCVx6 SCVx7 SCVx8 SCVx9 in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm M M / G 1/ / G 1/ / G 1/ / G 1/ / G 1/ / G 1/

179 P R I M A R Y U N IT SERIES SG SLIDES SERIES SM SLIDES SERIES SFP SLIDES UNIT NO. SG21 [SG61] SG22 [SG62] SG2 [SG6] SG24 [SG64] SG2 [SG6] SG26 [SG66] SM108 [SM08] SM112 [SM12] SM116 [SM16] SM12 [SM2] SM12 [SM2] SFP27 SFP * * * * PLATE THICKNESS KEY =.1 [7.9] =.7 [9.] =.00 [12.7] =.62 [1.9] =.70 [19.0] R200 [R20] R400 [R40] R600 [R60] 7 7 * * = 1.20 [1.8] = 1.00 [8.1] = [0.8] = [2.4] = 1.70 [44.] R800 [R80] * * RAS120 RAS12 RAS12 RAS140 RAS10 RLS112 RLS116 RLS120 RLS12 RLS12 RLS140 RLS10 RLS16 [RAS20] [RAS2] [RAS2] [RAS40] [RAS0] [RLS12] [RLS16] [RLS20] [RLS2] [RLS2] [RLS40] [RLS0] [RLS6] RIx2 RIx2 RIx * * * * * * * * * * * * * * SECONDARY UNIT ROTARY ACTUATORS * * * * * * * * 9 7 * * 9 7 * * 6 7 * * NOTES: 1) SHADED AREAS CONSULT PHD FOR AVAILABILITY 2) METRIC NUMBERS ARE IN [ ] ) RLS SHAFTS ARE NOT CENTERED ON ITS MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN. 4) MODEL NUMBERS IN CHART ARE FOR REFERENCE, SEE CODE CHART FOR ACTUAL ORDER CODE * * 10 8 * * RFS114 RFS120 RFS12 RCCx108 RCCx112 RCCx116 [RFS14] [RFS20] [RFS2] [RCCx08] [RCCx12][RCCx16] 2 Pages 10-2 Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations, Changes to Plate Thicknesses TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN C/U CATALOG 0 UPDATES = Numbers indicate the total thickness of two * plates, required due to design reasons Example: 9* = total thickness of two.00 plates Page of 7

180 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN C/U CATALOG 0 UPDATES Pages Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations, Changes to Plate Thicknesses SECONDARY UNIT GRIPPERS Page 6 of 7 P R I M A R Y U N IT SERIES SG SLIDES SERIES SM SLIDES SERIES SFP SLIDES UNIT NO. SG21 [SG61] SG22 [SG62] SG2 [SG6] SG24 [SG64] SG2 [SG6] SG26 [SG66] SM108 [SM08] SM112 [SM12] SM116 [SM16] SM12 [SM2] SM12 [SM2] SFP27 SFP x6x 9x7x 9x8x 9x9x * 9* 9* 9* 9* 9* 9* 9* 9* 7* 7* 7* 7* 7* GRBx2x GRBxx 2 2 9* 7* GRBx4x 2 4 GRBxx 2 4 GRBx6x 4 9* 9* 7* 7* 7* 7* GRBx7x 7* 7* GRCxx 4 4 9* 7* GRCx4x 4 GRCxx 4 GRCx6x 4 4 GRDxx * 9* * 9* 7* 7* 7* 7* GRDx4x GRDxx 2 2 GRDx6x 2 2 9* 9* 9* 7* 7* 7* GRRx0 P R I M A R Y U N IT SERIES SG SLIDES SERIES SM SLIDES SERIES SFP SLIDES UNIT NO. SG21 [SG61] SG22 [SG62] SG2 [SG6] SG24 [SG64] SG2 [SG6] SG26 [SG66] SM108 [SM08] SM112 [SM12] SM116 [SM16] SM12 [SM2] SM12 [SM2] SFP27 SFP40 9* 9* 7* 7* 7* PLATE THICKNESS KEY =.1 [7.9] =.7 [9.] =.00 [12.7] =.62 [1.9] =.70 [19.0] GRSx * 9* 7* 7* = Numbers indicate the total thickness of two * plates, required due to design reasons Example: 9* = total thickness of two.00 plates GRSx28 GRSx2 GRSx0 = 1.20 [1.8] = 1.00 [8.1] = [0.8] = [2.4] = 1.70 [44.] GRSx6 GRTx1 GRTx2 GRTx 9* 7* GRTx4 GRTx 9* 7* 7* SECONDARY UNIT GRTx6 GRIPPERS GRTx7 GRTx8 GRLx GRLx16 9 GRWx * * * * GRWx2 9* 7 NOTES: 1) SHADED AREAS CONSULT PHD FOR AVAILABILITY 2) METRIC NUMBERS ARE IN [ ] ) MODEL NUMBERS IN CHART ARE FOR REFERENCE, SEE CODE CHART FOR ACTUAL ORDER CODE GRWx2 * 7* GRWx40 GRWx0 GRFxxx19 9* 7* GRFxxx2 GRFxxx28 GRFxxx2 9* 7* 7* 7*

181 P R I M A R Y U N IT SERIES SG SLIDES SERIES SM SLIDES SERIES SFP SLIDES Position #1 SERIES SFP SLIDES Position # UNIT NO. SG21 [SG61] SG22 [SG62] SG2 [SG6] SG24 [SG64] SG2 [SG6] SG26 [SG66] SM108 [SM08] SM112 [SM12] SM116 [SM16] SM12 [SM2] SM12 [SM2] SFP27 SFP40 SFP27 SFP PLATE THICKNESS KEY =.1 [7.9] =.7 [9.] =.00 [12.7] =.62 [1.9] =.70 [19.0] SAx108 SAx110 SAx114 SAx120 SAx12 [SAx108][SAx110][SAx114][SAx120][SAx12] SBx108 SBx110 SBx114 SBx120 SBx12 [SBx108][SBx110][SBx114][SBx120][SBx12] = 1.20 [1.8] = 1.00 [8.1] = [0.8] = [2.4] = 1.70 [44.] SD22 SE SD2 SE2 4 4 = Numbers indicate the total thickness of two * plates, required due to design reasons Example: 9* = total thickness of two.00 plates SD24 SE SD2 SE2 4 SD26 SE26 SK71 SL71 4 SK72 SL72 4 SK7 SL7 4 SK74 SL74 4 SK7 SL7 4 * 9* 9* 9* 7* 9* 9* 9* 7* * 7* 7* 7* 7* 7* 7* 7* 7* 7* SK76 SL76 SHP108 SHP08 2 SECONDARY UNIT SLIDES SHP112 SHP12 SHP116 SHP16 SIP12 SIP16 SIP20 SJP08 2 SJP12 SJP16 2 9* 9* 9* 9* 9* 9* 9* 9* 9* * * * * * * * * STP108 STP08 STP112 STP12 STP116 STP16 STP120 STP20 STP12 STP2 SCVx12 [SCV2] 4 SCVx1 [SCV] NOTES: 1) SHADED AREAS CONSULT PHD FOR AVAILABILITY 2) METRIC NUMBERS ARE IN [ ] ) MODEL NUMBERS IN CHART ARE FOR REFERENCE, SEE CODE CHART FOR ACTUAL ORDER CODE 4 SCVx14 [SCV4] SCVx1 [SCV] SCVx16 [SCV6] SCVx17 [SCV7] SCVx18 [SCV8] SCVx19 [SCV9] Pages 10-1 Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations, Changes to Plate Thicknesses TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN C/U CATALOG 0 UPDATES Page 7 of 7

182 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PPC CYLINDER PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES BCZ NOZZLE CYLINDERS Series BCZ nozzle cylinders with attached Mac 400 series valves have proven to be faster in response and actuation time than the Sidel cylinder with Bosch valve combination. This allows the customer to speed up their machine if all of the nozzle cylinders are changed. However if all of the cylinders are not changed, this decreased actuation time can be a problem for the customer. The downward stroke on the cylinder is too fast and removes or traps the transfer arm gripper head between the nozzle and the top of the mold. This can cause downtime on the machine, scrap bottles, and damage the springs on the transfer arm. PHD will provide a fixed orifice disk to be installed in the valve below the extend exhaust muffler. It is sized to match the cycle time of the Sidel standard unit on the extend cycle. (11 ms) Standard (4mm Hex) CYLINDER EXTEND TIME TIME (msec) mm HEX EXHAUST ORIFICE 9 No Restriction ORIFICE FLOW AREA (in 2 ) EXTEND EXHAUST Discuss actuation times with your customer, especially when they are not retrofitting an entire machine. If you currently have actuators in the field running too fast, please contact PHD for a field retrofit orifice kit #7677. It may be necessary for you to adjust the orifice size of the orifice disk to match your customer's specific speed requirement. You can easily drill an additional hole in the aluminum disk, opening the orifice diameter to increase the speed of the cylinder. Please reference the Cycle Extend Time vs. Orifice Area. Contact PHD if slower than standard stroke velocities are required. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

183 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC2 DATE: -9-0 PRODUCT TYPE: ML #0278 & #0440 PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: PREFORM EJECT SLIDE PREFORM EJECT SLIDE VALVE CONNECTOR REWIRING The PHD Preform Eject Slide for replacement of Bosch and Festo slides on Sidel Series2 SBO machines is a direct bolt up replacement actuator. However, the valve cannot be supplied with the original connector interface. The valve connection is not a direct bolt up. It requires rewiring and replacement of the valve connector. Connector The existing solenoid connector is molded onto the cable. It must be cut off and rewired with the supplied connector. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

184 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC DATE: --0 PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: PPC CYLINDER MODEL OR SERIES: BCS1 & 2 STRETCH ROD CYLINDERS ROD BUSHING MOVEMENT It has come to our attention that Series BCS1 and BCS2 stretch rod cylinders built before 10/1/04 have experienced, in a few isolated cases, rod bushing movement in the head of the cylinder. The problems associated with this movement typically exhibit themselves as an intermittent rod seal leak. The bushing moves toward the rod seal and makes contact with the inner lip of the seal causing the lip to distort and produce a leak. The cylinder is still functional at this time, however possibly running slower and inefficiently. In even fewer cases, we have also experienced rod bushing movement where the bushing is pulled away from the rod seal into the tube of the cylinder. It will show up as a massive rod seal leak and if continued to operate, could cause rod end breakage. Both cases will allow the rods to drift downward when the air supply is removed for machine service. Seeing a potential problem earlier in the BCZ cylinders, PHD began securing the bushings in the heads of the BCS cylinders mechanically with a retaining ring on the BCS2. Loctite Black Max is used to secure the bushing in the BCS1. This upgrade was put into affect in October of 2004 as assurance of proper bushing retention. SERIES BSC1 SERIES BSC2 ROD BEARING LOCATOR ROD BEARING ROD SEAL, NOTE ORIENTATION ROD SEAL, NOTE ORIENTATION PRESS ROD BEARING FLUSH WITH THIS SURFACE PRESS ROD BEARING FLUSH WITH THIS SURFACE If your customer is experiencing intermittent rod seal leakage on either the BCS1 or 2 cylinders, remove the cylinder from service and check the bushing for movement. It should be flush against the inner counterbore of the head. (See drawing.) It will be necessary to remove the head from the cylinder. If the bushing is not flush, remove and clean the outer diameter of the bushing and inner diameter of the bore with an appropriate degreaser. Apply Loctite Black Max (mid-viscosity 480) to the leading edge of the bushing O.D. and press into the bore until flush. Allow Loctite to dry and reassemble cylinder. Reference Assembly and Disassembly instruction for Series BCS Cylinders (BCS2) and (BCS1). These documents are available on PHD's website: FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

185 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC4 PRODUCT TYPE: PPC CYLINDER MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES BCZ NOZZLE CYLINDERS Design Change on BCZ Nozzle Cylinders Effective immediately, PHD has implemented a design change to Series BCZ Nozzle Cylinders. The new design, BCZ2S-6, features a 2 mm longer body snout to accommodate a flange style bushing as well as the addition of a retaining ring. While no issues have been reported for Series BCZ Cold Set Nozzle Cylinders, this design change is being implemented to proactively address potential rod bushing movement as was previously identified on Series BCS1 and BCS2 Stretch Rod Cylinders (see TDB PPC). Bushing replacement in the field on the new design should prove to be faster and more efficient since the need to use a Loctite compound to retain the bushing is no longer necessary..709 [18].788 [20] LOCTITE BLACK MAX USED TO RETAIN SLEEVE BUSHING BCZ2S- Old Design RETAINING RING FLANGE BUSHING BCZ2S-6 New Design PHD will continue to support all old design, BCZ2S-, units in the field. Please note that the old and new designs have different repair kit part numbers. Please make sure you order the correct kit for your customer s design. DESCRIPTION REPAIR KIT REPAIR KIT PART NUMBER BCZ2S- BCZ2S None required. All incoming orders will be converted to the new units and kits. You may want to let your customers know about this design change to minimize questions and confusion. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

186 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: ALPS Leak Test Cylinder MODEL OR SERIES: PHD ML#0448 Rod Seal Leakage It has come to our attention that the PHD Leak Test Cylinders (ML#0448) can experience rod seal wear between and 10 million cycles. This problem is attributed to the amount of lubrication placed on the seal during initial construction of the cylinder. The seal wear exhibits itself by the rod turning black on a portion of the rod where the cylinder typically cycles through the rod seal. It may also exhibit itself by a slowing down of the cylinder, thereby rejecting good product. To extend the seal life and ensure proper cycling of the cylinder, additional lubrication should be applied to the rod seal. Preventative Maintenance Lubrication Instructions This preventative maintenance lubrication procedure will carry the lubrication into the rod seal groove and gland and should be performed every 2. million cycles. 1. Remove air pressure from the cylinder. 2. Extend the rod fully by hand.. Clean the rod with a clean towel using a light food grade mineral oil to wipe the black material from the rod. 4. With the rod still fully extended, brush on a 1/16 inch thick by 1/2 inch wide patch of Dow Corning White EP grease (#2, EP rated, food grade grease) completely around the rod next to the mounting flange.. Cycle the rod in and out of the cylinder by hand three or four times. Do not cycle the cylinder using air pressure, as this will energize the seal and keep the grease from migrating into the rod seal gland. 6. Repeat the application of the grease ring on the outside of the rod two more times and hand cycle actuator as described above. 7. Wipe any excess grease off of the mounting flange. A FOOD GRADE LUBE IN THIS AREA.00 A SECTION A-A If your customers see that the rods are turning black or are slowing to an extent to reject good product, please reference the preventative maintenance instructions given above. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

187 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC6 PRODUCT TYPE: PPC Cylinder MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES BCZ NOZZLE CYLINDER Design 7 Change on Series BCZ Nozzle Cylinders PHD s PPC Group has recently made new developments in Sidel Series2 blow nozzle caps sealing capability, resulting in a new stretch rod seal and bushing in the cap assembly that will provide approximately X longer life than previous seal as tested in a laboratory environment. Technical Changes from Design 6 to Design 7 1. New stretch rod seal and bushing in cap assembly will provide approximately X longer life than previous seal as tested in laboratory environment. As with the previous design, both the seals and bushing require food grade grease to obtain optimal life. 2. The new seal is larger and provides less friction on the stretch rod. Old seal and sleeve bushing NEW seal and flange bushing NEW Cap. No external dimensional changes were made. 4. New cap assemblies can be ordered to replace the current caps. Cap assemblies to be ordered using the full unit description -H1200 or part number Cap repair kits include both the new and old rod seal and bushing. Cap seal only kit includes new and old rod seals. Customers can easily replace parts in their current nozzle cylinders without having to know the model number. 6. New design number to be used when placing an order: BCZ2S-7-instead of BCZ2S-6 7. An addendum to the BCZ01A catalog will be created which includes the changes from design to design 7. KIT DESCRIPTION *Unit Repair Kit **Cap Repair Kit Cap Seal Only Kit Tooling Kit Rod Locking Nut Fastener Kit Manifold Kit Orifice Kit KIT NUMBER DESIGN DESIGNS 6 & NOTES: 1)*Includes all parts to repair the full unit excluding cap parts. 2)**Includes all hardware to completely repair cap. ) Includes rod seal and grease to replace cap seal only. 4) Includes all specialized tools required to rebuild unit. Make sure your customers know that this advantage is now available, as air loss is a big issue for them in regards to both cost, and a capacity point of view. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

188 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC7 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PPC Cylinder PAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: BCS2 & BCS26 Stretch Rod Cylinders BCS2 & BCS26 Check Valve Failure Series BCS2 and BCS26 Stretch Rod Cylinders built incorporating the Deltrol Check valve have experienced sporadic failures in the field and we no longer have confidence in the reliability of this valve. The problems associated with these check valves have been exhibited by the stretch rod occasionally dropping during shutdown, when it should be held in the retracted position until released by the operator. The few failures we have seen have not caused poor bottle quality, nor machine crashes, but has the potential to become a safety issue should the rod come down before maintenance personnel are prepared for it. This is not a widespread issue, but as we do not see a more reliable solution possible with the current manufacturer, we have taken the step to change suppliers. If your customer is experiencing intermittent check valve leakage on either the Series BCS2 or BCS26 Cylinders, we have two possible solutions available. 1) We developed an inline housing containing a Kepner check valve that we will exchange, free of charge, for every Deltrol. Via PHD's website, request an RGA number and order the required quantity needed for replacement. When we receive the failed Deltrol check valves, we will issue credit against the ones you have ordered. This is a simple replacement that can be done with the cylinder still mounted to the Sidel machine. Removal and mounting instructions will be supplied. This higher quality poppet style check valve should provide a longer service life, but we cannot warrant the length of life due to the dynamics and conditions of the individual machines. These conditions involve the high flow rate through the valve, centripetal force, and the individual response of the valve to vibrations and cycle rates on the machine. We believe the Kepner valve is better in this application due to the poppet style design. The poppet is supported throughout the stroke of the valve. It also has a more robust spring guide which keeps the spring from over compressing, therefore extending life. This will replace the Deltrol as our standard inline check valve in the -X2 option. 2) We have also taken the step to offer a pilot operated check valve, a more expensive solution that we do feel comfortable warranting and is the check valve specified by Sidel on the new Universal Machine. The pilot operated (PO) check valve operates in the same manner as the inline check valve. Optionally, it also allows external control of the check valve poppet. This can keep the spring and poppet from cycling each time the supply pressure drops. Vibration effects from the machine are minimized since the poppet is held firmly in place by the pilot pressure, extending the life of the check valve. Customer must modify thepneumatic circuit and control the external pilot pressure. The check valve acts as a standard check valve even if no pilot pressure is installed and still traps pressure in the cylinder to keep the stretch rod from dropping during machine shut down. In summary, if your customers would like to replace their failed Deltrol check valve with the Kepner check valve, providing that the failed Deltrol check valve is returned to us, they will receive credit for the Kepner check valve making it free of charge. The PO check valve is a more expensive option so if they would like to replace their failed Deltrol check valve with a PO check valve, providing that the failed Deltrol check valve is returned to us, they will be required to pay only the difference between the cost of the Kepner check valve and the PO check valve. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

189 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC7 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PPC Cylinder PAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: BCS2 & BCS26 Stretch Rod Cylinders PHD UNIT BCS20 BCS260 BCS20 BCS260 BCS20 BCS260 VALVE KITS KIT DESCRIPTION Kepner Check Valve Kepner Check Valve Pilot Operated Check Valve Pilot Operated Check Valve Pilot Operated Check Valve w/ -L12 Option Pilot Operated Check Valve w/ -L12 Option KIT NO For a period of time, customers who have not specified the LR6 option will receive an inline Kepner check valve with an installed length longer than illustrated in the catalog. Please reference chart below. After this brief period of time when stock has been fabricated, all units will be shipped to the illustrated dimension. Due to possible interference problems existing only on the heat set machines, customers who have specified the LR6 option for heat set usage will receive an inline Kepner check valve to the cataloged specified length of.18 inches. PHD UNIT BCS20 BCS260 ILLUSTRATED DIMENSION in.18 in ACTUAL DIMENSION.86 in 4.80 in FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

190 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC8 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PPC Cylinder PAGE 1 OF 1 ML066 ML0877 ML0686 ML0690 ML07217 ML0799 MODEL OR SERIES: Series1 Blow Nozzle Cylinders Maintenance Instructions for PHD Series1 Blow Nozzle Cylinders We have noticed that we have been inconsistent with shipping out maintenance instructions along with our Series1 Nozzle Cylinders, and would like to make sure that you and your customers have the information needed to obtain the longest life possible out of your customers unit(s). For maximum life, PHD recommends lubricating all seals which come in contact with the stretch rod every months with the following lubrication: FDA Regulation 21 CFR Lubrication Procedures: With stretch rod installed: 1. Fully extend the stretch rod. 2. Apply a 1/2 inch wide ring of lubricant around the outside diameter of the stretch rod just below the blow nozzle bell.. Fully retract the stretch rod. 4. Once again, fully extend the stretch rod once and wipe away the excess lube from it. With stretch rod removed: 1. With a small brush or similar device, apply a small amount of lubricant to inside surface of the stretch rod seal(s). As machine set-ups and conditions vary, PHD Inc. cannot guarantee the same extended life will be seen as that resulting from PHD s own lab testing of the stretch rod seal. Inform current and potential customers of the recommended lubrication of Series1 Nozzle Cylinders stretch rod seals. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

191 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: CL1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: CLAMPS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES PLM CATALOG PLM01 CORRECTION ON PAGE 6 Switch Cable Connection Direction There is a mistake on page 6 of the PLM01 catalog. The switch cable connection direction is called out incorrectly in the dimensional drawing on the bottom of the page. The Ordering Data is correct, but the data on page 6 is incorrect. The (1) is for the connector to be parallel to the mounting surface and the (9) is for the connector to be perpendicular to the mounting surface. The highlighted areas shown below are the affected information. We have also included instructions in the event you need or wish to change the cable connector direction [10.8].7 [94.8].441 [87.4] PS(R)4A9 = 1/2-20 UNF CABLE CONNECTION PS(R)4D9 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTION PS(R)4E9 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTION PS(R)4F9 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTION.160 [4.1] MAX.160 [4.1] MAX NOTES: 1) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS SPECIFICALLY TOLERANCED 2) ALL METRIC DIMENSIONS [ ] ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS 1 mm =.097 in SWITCH HOUSING CAN MOVE TO DIMENSIONS SHOWN 2X.197 [.0] HEX SWITCH HOUSING 1.0 [8.9] MAX 90 PS(R)4D1 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTION PS(R)4E1 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTION PS(R)4F1 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTION.17 [4.0] HEX FINGER EXTENDED SWITCH (ADJUSTABLE).874 [22.2] MAX Procedure to Change Direction of Cable Connection LOOSEN THE TWO M6 SHCS (IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO REMOVE THEM COMPLETELY) SLIDE SWITCH COVER UP BY " APPROX -Pxxx9 SHOWN LOOSEN SHCS ON SWITCH STEP 1 STEP 2 SLIDE SWITCH COVER BACK ONTO CLAMP BODY TIGHTEN THE TWO M6 SHCS TO 8 in-lb STEP MOVE SWITCH TO NEW POSITION THEN TIGHTEN SWITCH SHCS STEP 4 -Pxxx1 SHOWN Please keep a copy of this page with your PLM01 catalog and be sure your customers are ordering the cable connection designation correctly. If it was ordered incorrectly, the instructions are included to adjust the connector. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

192 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC9 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PPC Cylinder PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: Series BCS Stretch Rod Cylinder New Option -X26 Replaces Option -X2 The -X2 option, which includes the PHD/Kepner check valve, is no longer being offered. It is being replaced with an -X26 option, which includes a Norgren check valve, model TC4800. This check valve is identical to the one the majority of the customers use or have used on their Bosch stretch rod cylinders, so its performance capability is known to most of them. This check valve will not be covered under the PHD warranty umbrella, and any quality issues will need to be brought before Norgren. -X26 OPTION PHD highly recommends that those of you with orders awaiting shipment, to confirm approval from your customers with regard to this change, before we ship your units. Everyone should inform customers that this change has occurred. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

193 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G18 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: Grippers PAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: GRK GRK Grippers Have Higher Grip Forces than Previously Cataloged The following information is revised grip force data for the recently released Series GRK Pneumatic Grippers. PHD has incorporated a new surface treatment and lubrication technology that reduces the friction in the internal jaw mechanism and thus significantly increases the grip force. This provides PHD a greater advantage in the marketplace. Catalogs, animation software, and sizing software will be revised in the next few weeks. In the meantime, please use the following grip force information when comparing PHD to Schunk or when specifying the GRK Grippers in highly competitive situations. Change in cataloged grip force (zero tooling length at 87 psi): Total Close Grip Force at 87 psi (lb) GRK Gripper Published Actual Percent Size Grip Force Grip Force Increase x % x % 46 x % 46 x % 8 x % 8 x % 7 x % 7 x % (continued on next page) Inform potential customers for GRK Grippers of this grip force increase. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

194 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G18 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: Grippers PAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: GRK LONG TRAVEL UNIT GRIP FORCE Originally Cataloged SHORT TRAVEL UNIT GRIP FORCE Currently Shipping Grip Force (lb) Grip Force (lb) Grip Force (lb) Grip Force (lb) Tooling Length (mm) Tooling Length (mm) Tooling Length (mm) Tooling Length (mm) GRK Grip Force (lb) GRK46 Grip Force (lb) GRK8 Grip Force (lb) GRK7 Grip Force (lb) Tooling Length (mm) Tooling Length (mm) Tooling Length (mm) Tooling Length (mm) FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

195 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PHDP1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PHD PLus PAGE 1 OF MODEL OR SERIES: ECV, ESK/ESL, ESG Engineering Data, Life Charts and Equations See changes below. Page 6: ZERO STROKE (JO) lb-in 2 [kg-m 2 ] [.00 x 10-6 ] 0.01 [1.0 x 10 - ] 0.16 [4.84 x 10 - ] LENGTH ADDER (JL) lb-in 2 /in [kg-m 2 /mm] [9.8 x 10-9 ] [2.90 x 10-8 ] [7.9 x 10-8 ] MOVING WEIGHT lb-in 2 /lb 9.6 x x x x x x 10-2 ADDER (JM) [kg-m 2 /kg] [6.21 x 10-7 ] [2.48 x 10-6 ] [2.48 x 10-6 ] [6.6 x 10-6 ] [2.48 x 10-6 ] [9.9 x 10-6 ] INERTIA Page 24: INERTIA MOTOR CONFIGURATION (JQ) -QF [1.40 x 10 - ] [4.71 x 10 - ] 0.19 [4.6 x 10 - ] -QF21 lb-in 2 [kg-m 2 ] [2.7 x 10 - ] 0.28 [8.28 x 10 - ] 0.64 [1.91 x 10-4 ] -QL [.14 x 10-6 ] [6.11 x 10-6 ] 0.18 [4.04 x 10 - ] ZERO STROKE (JO) lb-in 2 [kg-m 2 ] [.00 x 10-6 ] 0.01 [1.0 x 10 - ] 0.16 [4.84 x 10 - ] LENGTH ADDER (JL) lb-in 2 /in [kg-m 2 /mm] [9.8 x 10-9 ] [2.90 x 10-8 ] [7.9 x 10-8 ] MOVING WEIGHT lb-in 2 /lb 9.6 x x x x x x 10-2 ADDER (JM) [kg-m 2 /kg] [6.21 x 10-7 ] [2.48 x 10-6 ] [2.48 x 10-6 ] [6.6 x 10-6 ] [2.48 x 10-6 ] [9.9 x 10-6 ] MOTOR -QF [1.40 x 10 - ] [4.71 x 10 - ] 0.19 [4.6 x 10 - ] CONFIGURATION -QF21 lb-in 2 [kg-m 2 ] [2.7 x 10 - ] 0.28 [8.28 x 10 - ] 0.64 [1.91 x 10-4 ] (JQ) -QL [.14 x 10-6 ] [6.11 x 10-6 ] 0.18 [4.04 x 10 - ] Page 8: INERTIA ZERO STROKE (JO) lb-in 2 [kg-m 2 ] [.00 x 10-6 ] 0.01 [1.0 x 10 - ] 0.01 [1.0 x 10 - ] LENGTH ADDER (JL) lb-in 2 /in [kg-m 2 /mm] [9.8 x 10-9 ] [2.90 x 10-8 ] [2.90 x 10-8 ] MOVING WEIGHT lb-in 2 /lb 9.6 x x x x x x 10 - ADDER (JM) [kg-m 2 /kg] [6.21 x 10-7 ] [2.48 x 10-6 ] [2.48 x 10-6 ] [6.6 x 10-6 ] [2.48 x 10-6 ] [6.6 x 10-6 ] MOTOR CONFIGURATION (JQ) Pages 6, 24, & 8 -QF [1.40 x 10 - ] [4.71 x 10 - ] [4.71 x 10 - ] -QF21 lb-in 2 [kg-m 2 ] [2.7 x 10 - ] 0.28 [8.28 x 10 - ] 0.28 [8.28 x 10 - ] -QL [.14 x 10-6 ] [6.11 x 10-6 ] [6.11 x 10-6 ] WEIGHT AND INERTIAL CALCULATIONS: TOTAL WEIGHT = WOT + (WLT x TRAVEL) + MOTOR MOUNT WEIGHT TOTAL MOVING WEIGHT = WOM + (WLM x TRAVEL) + EXTERNAL PAYLOAD FOR -Qx11: INERTIA Reflected = JO + (J L x TRAVEL) + (JM x TOTAL MOVING WEIGHT) + JQ FOR -QF21: INERTIA Reflected = [JO + (JL x TRAVEL) + (JM x TOTAL MOVING WEIGHT)] / 4 + JQ Please contact PHD Customer Service for additional assistance if required. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

196 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PHDP1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PHD PLus PAGE 2 OF Page 26: MODEL OR SERIES: ECV, ESK/ESL, ESG [0] [00] 6.20 [20] [200].72 [10] [100] [0] [0].97 [100].90 [10] [200] [20] [00] [0] [400] [40] [.0] [.10] 0.01 [.2] [.0] [.7] 0.09 [1] [2] [] [0] [00] 6.20 [20] [200].72 [10] [100] [0] [100] [200] Million Inches [200 km] Life Million Inches [000 km] Life [00] [400] [900] [800] 17.6 [700] 14.9 [600] [00] [400] [00] [200] [100] [0].97 [100].90 [10] [200] [20] [00] [0] [400] [40] [.0] [.10] 0.01 [.2] [.0] [.7] 0.09 [1] [2] [] [1000] [900] [800] 17.6 [700] 14.9 [600] [00] [400] [00] [200] [100] [100] [200] Million Inches [200 km] Life Million Inches [000 km] Life [00] [400] 14.7 [1400] [1200] [.0] [.10] 14.7 [1400] [1200] Million Inches [200 km] Life Million Inches [000 km] Life [1000] 0.01 [.2] [1000] [800] 14.9 [600] [400] [200] [0] [100] [10] [200] [20] [00] [0] [400] [40] [00] 21.6 [0] [.0] [.7] 0.09 [1] [2] [] [800] 14.9 [600] [400] [200] [100] [200] [00] [400] [00] Please contact PHD Customer Service for additional assistance if required. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

197 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PHDP1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PHD PLus PAGE OF Page 27: MODEL OR SERIES: ECV, ESK/ESL, ESG [400] [00] [.0] [.10] 0.01 [.2] [400] [00] Million Inches [200 km] Life Million Inches [000 km] Life [200] [.0] [.7] [200] [100] 0.09 [1] [2] [100] [0].97 [100].90 [10] [200] [20] [00] [0] [400] [40] [00] 21.6 [0] [600] [] [100] [200] [00] [400] [00] [600] [900] [800] 17.6 [700] [.0] [.10] [1100] [1000] [900] [800] Million Inches [200 km] Life Million Inches [000 km] Life 14.9 [600] [00] [400] [00] [200] [100] 0.01 [.2] [.0] [.7] 0.09 [1] [2] [] 17.6 [700] 14.9 [600] [00] [400] [00] [200] [100] [0].97 [100].90 [10] [200] [20] [00] [0] [400] [40] [00] 21.6 [0] [600] [100] [200] [00] [400] [00] [600] 14.7 [1400] [1200] [1000] [800] 14.9 [600] [400] [200] [.0] [.10] 0.01 [.2] [.0] [.7] 0.09 [1] [2] [] 9.69 [1600] 14.7 [1400] [1200] [1000] [800] 14.9 [600] [400] [200] Million Inches [200 km] Life Million Inches [000 km] Life [0] [100] [10] [200] [20] [00] [0] [400] [40] [00] 21.6 [0] [600] 2.90 [60] 27.9 [700] [100] [200] [00] [400] [00] [600] 27.9 [700] Please contact PHD Customer Service for additional assistance if required. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

198 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R10 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RFS Series RFS Application Unit Orientation Recommendation/Warning The Series RFS Rotary Actuators are designed to be used with the rotary table in a horizontal up attitude or with the rotary table in a vertical attitude as shown below. PHD does not recommend the Series RFS Rotary Actuators in applications where the rotary table is horizontal-inverted also shown below. For applications requiring a horizontal-inverted rotary, contact PHD Unique Solutions for specifications of available units. Acceptable Acceptable Not Acceptable LOAD LOAD LOAD Vertical Horizontal - Up Horizontal - Inverted Update your information so that when recommending or specifying rotary actuators on future projects the Series RFS Rotary Actuators will not be used in a horizontal-inverted orientation. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

199 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 PRODUCT TYPE: Grippers BULLETIN NUMBER: G19 MODEL OR SERIES: GRR PARALLEL New -STT99 Coupled Jaw Position Sensor Option This option has the same functional performance as the -SPP99 option, except it is mechanically coupled and must be specified when the order is placed. This option cannot be added to the unit at a later time. The catalog pdf file has been updated online to reflect this addition. Below is the pertinent information (highlighted) about the -STT99 Jaw Position Sensor option. SERIES GRR ORDERING DATA TO ORDER SPECIFY: Product Line, Series, Type, Synchronization, Jaw, Design No., Size, Total Jaw Travel, and Options required. SERIES Regular Duty SYNCHRONIZATION 0 - Non-synchronized 1 - Synchronized 2 - Non-synchronized independently powered jaws DESIGN NO. (See Note 1) 2 - Imperial 6 - Metric L9 OPTIONS (OMIT IF NOT REQUIRED) PORT OPTIONS - NPT Ports (metric units only) UNIT OPTIONS H47 - Rodlok (See Note 2) V1 - Fluoro-Elastomer Seals except for Rodlok mechanism Z1 - Corrosion resistant coating on exposed parts except for Rodlok mechanism and Rodlok rod SENSOR OPTIONS SPP99 - Rotary jaw position sensor installed (see Note ) STT99 - Coupled rotary jaw position sensor installed (see Note 4) OPTIONS (OMIT IF NOT REQUIRED) JAW TRAVEL LIMITING OPTIONS GRR02, GRR12 & GRR22 ANxxx - Jaw travel limitation on open, both jaws ATxxx - Jaw travel limitation on closed, both jaws GRR02 & GRR22 ONLY APxxx - Jaw travel limitation on open, Jaw A only AQxxx - Jaw travel limitation on open, Jaw B only ARxxx - Jaw travel limitation on closed, Jaw A only AUxxx - Jaw travel limitation on closed, Jaw B only G R R x Z1 - H47 PRODUCT LINE G - Gripper 48 JAW B 1 TYPE Long Travel, High Capacity, Parallel Gripper 99 AA JAW A JAW Style 2 7 BORE SIZE 26 MINIMUM TOTAL JAW TRAVEL 10 = 10 mm (.906 in) 200 = 200 mm (7.874 in) 20 = 20 mm (9.84 in) 0 = 0 mm (1.780 in) OPEN POSITION CLOSED POSITION Total Jaw Travel = (Open position - Closed Position) NOTES: 1) Design number indicates imperial or metric mounting holes and ports. Dowel pin holes are metric regardless of design number. 2) Standard unit is Rodlok ready. ) Available on GRR1 only. GRR1 unit is SPP99 ready. 4) Available on GRR1 only. -STT99 option must be ordered with the gripper. Only sensor replacement kits are available. REPLACEMENT STT99 JAW POSITION SENSOR KITS KIT STANDARD CORROSION RESISTANT Sensor Replacement Kit Kit includes 1 jaw position sensor, 2 mounting screws, 1 seal and spring Inform potential customers about this new option and make them aware of the updated pdf on PHD s website. Refer to CAT-GRR.pdf FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

200 DATE: PAGE 2 OF 2 PRODUCT TYPE: Grippers BULLETIN NUMBER: G19 MODEL OR SERIES: GRR PARALLEL STT99 coupled jaw position sensor mm HEX SIZE Ø [Ø 1.0] MIN HOLE TO ALLOW REMOVAL OF POSITION SENSOR [M8 X 1] THREAD 1 MALE QUICK CONNECT Ø 1.00 [Ø 8.1] MIN HOLE TO PROVIDE CLEARANCE FOR POSITION SENSOR 4 Ø SP2 SP1 2 SP J8 LETTER DIM J8 SP1 SP2 SP MODEL NUMBER GRRx2-x-6 in mm VDC (PIN 1) RESOLUTION Resolution of sensor installed into gripper is inch [0.02 mm] in conjunction with an analog control module having 1 bits or greater input resolution. CONNECTOR INTERFACE SIGNAL OUT (PIN 2) GROUND (PIN ) REPEATABILITY Maximum variation of reported grip dimension when repeatedly gripping the same object is ±0.002 in [±0.0 mm]. ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Limits: -20 to 180 F [-28 to 82 C] IP67 compliant when installed in gripper. ELECTRICAL Supply Voltage: 1-0 VDC, reverse polarity protected Output Voltage: 0-10 VDC, short-circuit protected Output Constant: 66 ± 1mV/inch [26.10 ± 0.04 mv/mm] of grip change Output Voltage Offset: <10mV typical Output Linearity: ± 0.% FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

201 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 2 BULLETIN NUMBER: SW21 PRODUCT TYPE: switches and sensors MODEL OR SERIES: VARIOUS, SEE CHART Legacy Switches and Cordsets Over the years, PHD has accumulated a variety of legacy switches and cordsets which currently have minimal sales volume. This is the result of new switch designs and technology and corresponding actuators which have been obsoleted over the years. PHD has made the determination to obsolete and no longer manufacture these switches. To address this, PHD will implement a two phase plan. Phase 1 affects the group of switches which will be obsoleted immediately. Phase 2 affects the group of switches which will be obsoleted over a period of time. PHD will address the plan for this group at a later date. The chart on the following page lists the PHD switches and cordsets to be obsoleted. Also shown is a cross-reference to a comparable switch or cordset which can be used in lieu of the obsoleted product in the majority of situations. For the customers who would prefer to purchase any of the obsoleted products, PHD will offer a one time, first come offering of all remaining inventory. Following this , PHD will send each distributor a list of customers who have purchased these items in the past two years. Please contact these accounts to advise them of the impending obsolescence and confirm if they would like to order any of the remaining inventory. Concerning the cordsets specifically, in addition to PHD, these can be purchased from many mill supply and electrical houses. Orders will be accepted until September 1, After this date, any remaining inventory will be purged from PHD. For additional assistance or to check available inventory, please contact PHD Customer Service. Please contact your customers to advise them of the impending obsolescence and confirm if they would like to order any of the switches and cordsets remaining in inventory. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

202 DATE: PAGE 2 OF 2 BULLETIN NUMBER: SW21 PRODUCT TYPE: switches and sensors MODEL OR SERIES: VARIOUS, SEE CHART SERIES PART NUMBER STATUS REED PROX SET POINT MODULE CORDSET APPLICATION / OPTION ALTERNATE PRODUCT SWITCH CORDSET BRACKET KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL CABLED CABLED CABLED CABLED CABLED CABLED CABLED CABLED CABLED CABLED CABLED CABLED QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT xx 649-xx 649-xx 649-xx 649-xx 649-xx 649-xx 649-xx 649-xx 6197-xx 6197-xx 6197-xx KILL QUICK CONNECT xx 240V AC APPLICATION NO LONGER SUPPORTED 120V AC: CURRENT CABLED xx-x AB12 KILL LIMITING ALLOWED QUICK CONNECT xx xx-x 120V AC: CURRENT LMTNG NOT ALLW'D xx-xx 142-xx-x 24V DC CABLED xx-x QUICK CONNECT xx xx-x KILL CABLED QUICK CONNECT KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL KILL Note: Alternate may not work in all applications due to differing cable length xx-x xx xx-x PRODUCT DOES NOT HAVE A REPLACEMENT xx 6197-xx FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

203 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: OPT1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PHD OPTIMAX PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: OCG Model: Optimax Series OCG using: Switch bundle Bracket part number Series OCG Cylinder Switch Bracket Change This change affects the switch bracket used with the Optimax Cylinder only. The switch bracket changes from a molded plastic housing to cast zinc. The new bracket simplifies installation and eliminates small loose parts. No action required. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

204 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 BULLETIN NUMBER: SW22 PRODUCT TYPE: switches and sensors MODEL OR SERIES: SWITCH BRACKET #142-xx-x Legacy Large Bore Switch Brackets PHD has made the determination to no longer manufacture switch brackets sold for use on 1-1/2" to 4" bore NFPA Cylinders. This decision is based on low usage of these brackets that are used solely with old design legacy/obsolete switches. The chart below specifies the bracket part numbers as well as the associated extrusion. Bracket Part Number Qty. Available Raw Extrusion Part Number Ft. Available ' ' ' ' ' ' ' PHD will offer a one time, first come-first serve offering on all remaining inventory. Following this , PHD will send each distributor as applicable a list of customers who have purchased these switch brackets during the last 2 years. Please contact these accounts and confirm their interest in purchasing. Orders will be accepted until October 1, After this date all remaining inventory will be purged. For additional assistance or to check availability, please contact PHD Customer Service. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

205 DATE: /2/201 PAGE 1 OF BULLETIN NUMBER: SW2 PRODUCT TYPE: switches and sensors MODEL OR SERIES: SWITCH MODEL Phase Out of Amp Reed Switch PHD will cease manufacturing and sale of the proximity switch once current inventory is depleted. Recommended Replacement: PHD recommends using the Series , Amp Reed (TRIAC) along with the appropriate 142-xx- Switch Bracket and cordset number 190-xx-x. As this switch is no longer cataloged the engineering information is included with this bulletin. ORDERING DATA: SERIES 190 SWITCHES TO ORDER SPECIFY: Type, Sensing Circuitry, and Design No. NOTES: 1) Cordsets for quick connect switches must be ordered separately. 2) Other cable lengths available. Consult PHD. TYPE Reed SENSING CIRCUITRY DESCRIPTION 1-1 AMP AC Reed PART NO CORDSETS DESCRIPTION 12 ft [.6 m] Cordset for Reed Switch, Straight Connector 12 ft [.6 m] Cordset for Reed Switch, 90 Connector Inform affected customers of this upcoming change and the replacement switch available. For additional assistance or to check availability, please contact PHD Customer Service. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

206 DATE: /2/201 PAGE 2 OF BENEFITS Reed Switches are suitable for use on most Tom Thumb/ PHD products. Adjustable mounting allows switches to be located anywhere within range of piston travel. Several switches may be mounted to control or initiate any sequence function. Liquid Resistant Switches can be used in applications where coolant or moisture due to washdown is present (IEC IP67 rating). Consult PHD for compatibility with caustic or hazardous liquids. No externally moving parts to wear or maintain. Suited for use in plant environments where dirt and contamination create difficulties for electromechanical and other types of controls. LED provides convenient means for positioning and troubleshooting switch and circuits. Amp Switch provides internal transient protection under normal conditions (AC only). The PHD Reed Switch operates on AC current. They are ideal for use as inputs for many types of sequencers and programmable controllers. In some cases they can be used to drive some relays or valve solenoids. The Amp Switch is very similar to the Reed Switch in construction. The difference is the inclusion of a triac which upgrades the contact rating to amps. The Amp Switch also has built-in protection against electrical transients. BULLETIN NUMBER: SW2 PRODUCT TYPE: switches and sensors MODEL OR SERIES: SWITCH MODEL AMP REED SWITCH (TRIAC) SPECIFICATIONS OPERATING PRINCIPLE Magnetic Reed ACTUATED BY Piston Magnet INPUT VOLTAGE 6 to 120 VAC (0/60 Hz) VA MAX. 60 CURRENT (BREAK) Amp LEAKAGE 1.7 ma. RESPONSE TIME 1. ms On, 0-8. ms Off LED INDICATOR Visible throughout voltage range ENVIRONMENTAL IP67 OPERATING TEMP. 0 to 80 C NOTE: All incandescent loads derate switch capacity to 10% due to inrush current. Consult PHD for higher load requirement for the Amp switch AC ONLY 117 VAC LINE NEUTRAL REED WIRING SCHEMATICS PIN 2 SWITCH PIN LOAD PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN PIN 1 LED PIN 2 DIMENSIONS: SERIES 190 SWITCHES [2.] [.8].76 [19.4].00 [12.7] 1/2-20 [12 mm] THREAD FOR CORDSET REED SWITCHES USE POLE TYP.72[14.] FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

207 DATE: /2/201 PAGE OF BULLETIN NUMBER: SW2 PRODUCT TYPE: switches and sensors MODEL OR SERIES: SWITCH MODEL DIMENSIONS: 142-xx- SWITCH BRACKET [2.] [27] [27.8].12 [7.9] 1.00 [26.7] SWITCH BRACKET DOES NOT EXTEND BEYOND CYLINDER OUTLINE ON THIS SIDE SERIES AV & HV EA, EL, & NEA NPG CYLINDERS BORE SIZE IMPERIAL / /8 1-/8 /4 1-1/8 1-/ /8 1-/8 METRIC LIQUID RESISTANT ROTARY & MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS SERIES 1000 & & & & 8000 MINIATURE LIQUID RESISTANT SWITCH LINEAR SECTION ROTARY SECTION PART NO STRAIN RELIEF KITS DESCRIPTION Strain Relief Kit for use with Large Bore Cylinder Switch Brackets LARGE BORE CYLINDERS BORE SIZE IMPERIAL 1-1/ /2-1/4* 4, 6, & 8 METRIC LIQUID RESISTANT *-1/4" Bore C & C Cylinders require switch bracket SWITCH CORDSETS [4.6] Ø 1/4 [6.4] CORD [29.0] MAX 190x-00-xx STRAIGHT CONNECTOR CORDSET 1.20 [0.] MAX Ø 1/4 [6.4] CORD CORD WILL EXTEND FROM SWITCH ON THE LED SIDE OF THE SWITCH 190x-90-xx 90 CONNECTOR CORDSET LED INDICATOR REF TYPE OF SWITCH REED REED DESCRIPTION straight connector 90 connector PHD CORDSET PART NO DANIEL WOODHEAD PART NO NOTE: PHD reserves the right to supply any of the cordsets listed. JOY PART NO LUMBERG PART NO. RKT U-618/12F RKWT U-618/12F PIN/WIRE COLOR ASSIGNMENT FOR PHD, DANIEL WOODHEAD, JOY, AND LUMBERG CORDSETS WIRE 2 1 POLE PIN ASSIGNMENT 1 GREEN 2 RED WITH BLACK TRACER RED WITH WHITE TRACER FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER FACE VIEW OF PLUGS PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

208 BULLETIN NUMBER: SW24 DATE: /21/2016 PRODUCT TYPE: switches and sensors PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: JC1STP Environmental Protection for PHD Teachable Switches If the JC1STP teachable switches are used in an environment were the switch is exposed to solvents the programmer housing could swell or become soft and sticky. To prevent this, use clear polyolefin heat shrink tubing to increase switch life. The potting material used in the programmer housing of the PHD JC1STP teachable switch performs well in many automotive, commercial, and consumer chemical environments, but it is sensitive to strongly polar solvents as well as strong acids and bases. Denatured alcohol is an example of a polar solvent, gasoline is not. When attacked, the potting material softens and swells, eventually causing switch failure. Polyolefin heat shrink tubing can extend the life of the switch programmer housing in these environments. It is low cost, readily available and easy to field install. Clear polyolefin heat shrink tubing with large shrink ratios is needed. Two suitable sizes of clear, adhesive lined, semi-rigid polyolefin, 4:1 heat shrink tubing may be ordered from McMaster-Carr in small quantities: P/N 27K11 marked Raychem ES x6,.22" exp. -.00" rec. P/N 27K12 marked Raychem ES x6,.29" exp. -.06" rec. A three inch minimum length of tubing is used to protect the programmer housing. The small diameter tubing works best but the large size is easier to slip over the housing. Life in the most aggressive test solvent is greatly extended compared to an unprotected switch. The switch remains programmable without removing the tubing. Because the heat shrink tubing is semi-rigid but still relatively soft, care must be taken when operating the switch push button. Use a 2. mm ball end hex wrench and slow, steady pressure to activate the programmer button and the switch can be reprogrammed without damaging the tubing. No action required. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

209 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS BULLETIN NUMBER: C16 MODEL OR SERIES: Series CM Cylinder Discontinuing Series CMx Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder PHD is discontinuing the Series CMx Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder effective immediately due to low demand. Complete units and replacement parts are available until depleted from current inventory, after which no additional parts will be manufactured. For additional assistance or to check available inventory, please contact PHD Customer Service. Advise affected customers of this discontinuation FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

210 BULLETIN NUMBER: M DATE: 6/0/201 PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES MCS Discontinuing Series MCS Multi-Motion Actuators PHD is discontinuing the Series MCS Multi-Motion Actuators effective immediately due to low demand. Complete units and replacement parts are available until they are depleted from current inventory, after which no additional parts will be manufactured. For additional assistance or to check available inventory, please contact PHD Customer Service. Advise affected customers of this discontinuation. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

211 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL7 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: Slides PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SG Design Change to Metric Series SG Slides (9) The rod coupler that attaches the cylinder rod to the saddle has been redesigned to reduce the backlash on the metric SG slides with -H11 and -H12 options. The new coupler will not interchange with the old design coupling assembly. The saddle requires a different pocket (in Design 9), causing different part numbers for the saddle and new coupling parts. Options -H11 and -H12 require these parts and that is why the design number has been changed on all the SG metric units (on standard metric units, the CV cylinder rod still mounts directly to the saddle.) MID-POSITION TRAVEL Specify for position units. Travel from retract position 1 to mid-position 2. TO ORDER SPECIFY: Product, Series, Type, Design No., Size, Travel, and Options. PRODUCT S- Slide TYPE B - Standard linear ball bushing, standard shaft C - TC bushing, standard shaft D - TC bushing, oversize shaft SIZE 1-19 mm bore cylinder with 8 mm shaft standard, 10 mm shaft oversize 2-20 mm bore cylinder with 10 mm shaft standard, 12 mm shaft oversize - 2 mm bore cylinder with 12 mm shaft standard, 16 mm shaft oversize 4-2 mm bore cylinder with 16 mm shaft standard, 20 mm shaft oversize - 40 mm bore cylinder with 20 mm shaft standard, 2 mm shaft oversize 6-40 mm bore cylinder with 2 mm shaft standard, 0 mm shaft oversize WITH CYLINDER OPTIONS DB - Cushion controls both direction (Standard in location 1 & ) (See note 6) DE - Cushion control extend only (Standard in location 1) DR - Cushion control retract only (Standard in location ) H4 - Cylinder replacement only (See note ) H47- Rodlok cylinder with locking device adaptor (Not available on size 1) L9 - NPT WITH ports CYLINDER (NPT-standard OPTIONS on imperial units BSPP-standard on metric units) DB E - Series 170 Solid State magnetic piston (Available on size 1 only) MDE - Magnetic piston for Series 170 Switches on size 41 and 91. Magnetic piston DR for Series 620 Switches on sizes 42/92 through 46/96. H4 PB - Port controls both directions (Standard locations are 1 &, not available on E size 1) (See note 6) MPE - Port control extend only (Standard in location 1, not available on size 1) U6 PR - Port control retract only (Standard in location, not available on size 1) U7 UBxx - Optional port locations (N/A on -position units) Standard ports, cushion controls, and port controls are located in positions 1 &. Sizes 2 and use 10-2 [M] ports when combined with port controls on the same surface. WITHOUT CYLINDER OPTIONS H11- VDMA/ISO cylinder ready 2 and 40 mm bore H12- ISO 642 cylinder ready 16, 20, and 2 mm bore -H11 and -H12 are available on design number 9 metric units only. S G B E 4 x 6 x DB M PB BB Q1 Z1 SERIES G - Gantry THREE POSITION UNIT E - position cylinder (specify only if needed) DESIGN NO. 4 -Imperial 9 -Metric NOTES: 1) All units are shock ready as standard. Shock absorber kits are ordered separately. See option page for complete ordering information. 2) Shock absorber on retraction is not available with UB2x option (port position 2). ) Shock absorbers are not plated with -Z1 option. 4) Options -BB and -BR are not available with shock absorbers. ) Rodlok must be ordered separately when a replacement cylinder option -H4 is specified with -H47 unit. See option page for Rodlok kits. 6) Cushions and port controls are available on -DB and -PB options only (locations 1 and ) on -position units. SLIDE SLIDE TRAVEL SIZE IMPERIAL UNITS 41-1" to 12" 42-1" to 12" 4-1" to 16" 44-1" to 20" 4-1" to 24" 46-1" to 6" Available in 1/4" increments. Total slide travel from retract position 1 to extend position. MODEL NUMBER SLIDE SLIDE TRAVEL SIZE METRIC UNITS 91-2 mm to 0 mm 92-2 mm to 0 mm 9-2 mm to 40 mm 94-2 mm to 10 mm 9-2 mm to 610 mm 96-2 mm to 91 mm Available in mm increments. Total slide travel from retract position 1 to extend position. INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHES DESCRIPTION DC Inductive Proximity Switch 8 mm Threaded Current Sinking (NPN) DC Inductive Proximity Switch 8 mm Threaded Current Sourcing (PNP) Please contact PHD Customer Service for additional assistance if required. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER SLIDE OPTIONS BB - Shock Pad both directions BE - Shock Pad on extension BR - Shock Pad on retraction CB - Proximity Switch ready both ends* GX - Saddle mounting in position number 4 GY - Saddle mounting in position number 1 (Not available on sizes 1, 2, slides) L4 - Lube fitting in saddle port position 2 and 4 L6 - Lube fitting in saddle port position Q1 - Corrosion-resistant guide shafts (ends unplated) Z1 - Electroless nickel plated ferrous metal parts *Switches must be ordered separately. SHOCK ABSORBER KITS PHD SHOCK ABSORBER NO x x x SLIDE MODEL SGxx1, SGxx2 SGxx SGxx4, SGxx, SGxx6 PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

212 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL8 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SJP Discontinuing Series SJP Slides PHD is discontinuing the Series SJP Slides. These slides have been available on a ML basis for several years. Complete units and replacement parts are available until depleted from current inventory after which no additional parts will be manufactured. Replacement seals will still be available if the seals are used commonly with other product lines. Any seals unique to the SJP will be subject to availability and inventory depletion. Customers looking for replacements can refer to the Series SHP and SIP slides for similarly configured units as they offer newer technology in more robust and cost effective packages. For additional assistance or to check available inventory, please contact PHD Customer Service. Advise affected customers of this discontinuation FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

213 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS BULLETIN NUMBER: G20 MODEL OR SERIES: 8400 PARALLEL Discontinuing Series 8400 Parallel Grippers PHD is discontinuing the original Series 8400 "baseball diamond" style parallel gripper. This does not include the current Series 8400 Angular Grippers which are still available. The 8400 Parallel Grippers have been available on a ML basis for several years. Complete units and replacement parts are available until depleted from current inventory after which no additional parts will be manufactured. Replacement seals will still be available if the seals are used commonly with other product lines. Any seals unique to the 8400 will be subject to availability and inventory depletion. Customers looking for replacements can refer to the Series GRH, GRL, GRK grippers for similarly configured units as they offer newer technology in more robust and cost effective packages. For additional assistance or to check available inventory, please contact PHD Customer Service. Advise affected customers of this discontinuation FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

214 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS BULLETIN NUMBER: G21 MODEL OR SERIES: Series EGP Gripper Discontinuing Series EGP Electromechanical Gripper PHD is discontinuing the Series EGP Electromechanical Gripper effective immediately due to low demand. Complete units and replacement parts are available until depleted from current inventory, after which no additional parts will be manufactured. For additional assistance or to check available inventory, please contact PHD Customer Service. Advise affected customers of this discontinuation FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

215 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC10 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PPC Cylinder PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: Series BCS Stretch Rod Cylinder New Molded Seal for -X27 Option PHD part number 8662 (Rev B) is a seal used in the X27 option on the Series BCS Stretch Rod Cylinders. PHD switched from a machined seal to a molded seal. The color of the material has changed from black to yellow. The molded seal provides more consistency. PHD has lab and field-tested the new molded seal with results showing the same superior performance as the previous seal. NEW YELLOW QUICK EXHAUST SEAL PHD recommends that distributors with Series BCS Stretch Rod Cylinder customers should inform them of this change. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

216 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 BULLETIN NUMBER: SW2 PRODUCT TYPE: switches and sensors MODEL OR SERIES: SWITCH BRACKET #142-xx-x Discontinuing Series 142 Switch Brackets PHD is no longer manufacturing 142 switch brackets sold for use on Classic Series 190 Switches effective 8/1/16. This decision is based on low demand of these brackets which are used solely with old design legacy/obsolete switches. Replacement switches for these brackets are still available. However, for those customers requiring both a replacement switch and obsoleted bracket, PHD recommends transitioning to the Series 170 Switch. Please contact customer service for more information. The chart specifies the obsoleted bracket part numbers that are available until inventory is depleted. PHD is providing a first come, first serve offering on all remaining inventory. Following this notification, PHD will send each applicable distributor a list of customers who have purchased these switch brackets during the last two years. Bracket Part Number Quantity Available Please contact affected accounts and confirm their interest in purchasing. Orders will be accepted until October 1, After this date, all remaining inventory will be purged. For additional assistance or to check availability, please contact PHD Customer Service. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

217 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC11 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PPC Cylinder PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: Series FCA Filler Cylinder Discontinuing Series FCA Filler Cylinder PHD is discontinuing the Series FCA Filler Cylinder effective 8/1/16 due to low demand. Replacing the Series FCA is the Series FCB Filler Cylinder, a drop-in replacement for use with MAC bullet valves as well as the OEM valve and the MAC OEM replacement valve. PHD will continue to support Series FCA field unit repairs indefinitely. For more information on the Series FCB Filler Cylinder, visit Discontinued Series FCA Filler Cylinder New Series FCB Filler Cylinder Please advise affected customers of this discontinuation. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

218 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 BULLETIN NUMBER: SW26 PRODUCT TYPE: switches and sensors MODEL OR SERIES: #161-xxx 12 mm THREADED Discontinuing Series 161-xxx 12 mm Threaded DC Inductive Proximity Switch PHD is no longer offering the Series 161-xxx Threaded DC Inductive Proximity Switch. Similar switches are readily available from Balluff and many other suppliers. The chart below shows the switch dimensions. If the application is unknown, replacement switches should have a body length no greater than 60 mm and a minimum M12 x 1 thread length of 40. mm. Fully threaded switch bodies within the length limits will also work. Many applications will be able to use longer body switches and even quick connects, but these must be reviewed on an individual basis since we cannot know what other components might be in the way in these applications. The discontinued switch has a cable length of three meters. Many replacement switches will offer 2 or meter cable lengths. Be sure to have sufficient length for the application. PHD PART NO. BALLUFF PART NO. CABLE LENGTH TYPE DIMENSIONS A mm B mm C mm D mm BES BO-C M DC SINK (NPN) 60 M12 x BES-16-2-BO-C M DC SOURCE (PNP) 60 M12 x BES BO-E M AC 60 M12 x None. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

219 DATE: PAGE 1 OF 1 PRODUCT TYPE: CLAMPS BULLETIN NUMBER: CL2 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES PLK DESIGN 2 AND 6 New Series PLK Design Replaces Design 1 and PHD Series PLK Pin Locating Clamps have been updated. This new drop-in replacement offers more pin styles and pin diameters, providing the flexibility to meet application requirements in a standard package. The final day to order old design (1/) units as standard is 8/14/2017. After this date the old design will be processed and priced as an ML unit. NEW! PLK DESIGN 2 (6) FEATURES 2 Strokes ( mm & 10 mm) Imperial (2) or Metric (6) Ports Pin Diameters thru 0.00 (+.00/-.02 mm tolerance) Pin Styles (B, C & N) Standard Flange Mount Height (110 mm to 140 mm in 0. mm increments) 4 Standard Finger Directions (easily changed in the field) Standard Single Finger and Dual Finger Port Position 1 through 4 available with all positional sensing options Port Fittings (-LAA & LBB) Cylinder sensor flag and rod options (-R01 & R02) Cylinder Switch Options (SW00, 41, 42, 1 & 2) Rear Mounting Options (-B01 thru -B06) Lock Setting (-MT00 thru -MT40) (PIN Ø) (STROKE) ( ) B STYLE PIN DROP-IN FOR DESIGN 1() [1.2] (RADIUS) N STYLE PIN NEW PIN STYLE 1.19 Ø [.] 1.18 [0.1] (RADIUS) C STYLE PIN Ø [0.0] NEW PIN STYLE 0.71 [18.6] PART SUPPORT FLANGE [24.1] [17.0] 0.7 [19.2] 2X [28.] Additional Benefits Completely enclosed design NAAMS mounting Interchangeable pin sizes, styles and heights Positional sensing available Self-locking threads throughout [1.] Please contact affected accounts and notify them that the design has been updated with a drop-in replacement that offers additional pin style and diameters than the previous design. Make sure your internal purchasing/order placement staff are aware of this change. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260) [7.0] [12.0] PIN Ø = PIN Ø SPECIFIED = / mm ( / in) PIN Ø AVAILABLE FROM mm TO 0.00 mm ALL DIMENSIONS ARE REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS SPECIFICALLY TOLERANCED.

220 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC12 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PPC TRANSFER ARM PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: BST2x2 PRODUCTS AFFECTED: BST2S2--1 x 90 (options) BST2D2--1 x 90 (options) PRODUCTS NOT AFFECTED: BST2S--1 x 90 (options) BST2D--1 x 90 (options) BST2x2- Cam Bearing Wheel Replacement BACKGROUND: Design modifications have been added to the current Series2 Sidel Transfer Arm. A change was made to add a 2x2 linear cam bearing which will change from one-piece cam follower to bearing + thru-shaft + washers + locking nut design as shown below. We recommend replacing the existing units in the field if the cam bearing wheel assembly shown in the picture below (left) has started to become loose or unstable. Please notify affected customers that have the old design. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

221 TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC1 DATE: PRODUCT TYPE: PPC nozzle cylinder PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: BCZ2S-7 & BCZ2D-7 Discontinuing Design 7 of BCZ2 Sidel Series2 Nozzle Cylinders and Kits PRODUCTS AFFECTED: BCZ2S-7-80 x 4 (options) BCZ2D-7-80 x 4 (options) 7827 KIT; BCZ2S7 REPAIR KIT; BCZ2D, REPAIR, DBL. STAGE KIT; BCZ2X, CAP REPAIR KIT; BCZ, REPAIR, ROD SEAL BACKGROUND: In March 2017 PHD released Design 8 of the BCZ2 Sidel Series2 Nozzle Cylinder. This new design is a drop-in replacement for the Design 7 nozzle. The Design 7 nozzle and associated rebuild kits are now discontinued. Design 7 units in the field can be rebuilt with Design 8 kits. All Design 7 units sent in for the Rebuild Program will be rebuilt as Design 8. Please notify affected customers that have the old design. FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER PHD, Inc Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN U.S.A. Phone (260) Fax (260)

GRB. long life Compact Angular gripper SHIPS IN 1-2 days. Major Benefits. Industry Uses

GRB. long life Compact Angular gripper SHIPS IN 1-2 days. Major Benefits. Industry Uses long life Compact Angular gripper SHIPS IN 1-2 days hardened steel jaws have robust design and include dowel holes for precise tooling location steel cover, jaw design, and tight jaw slots minimize external

More information

PNEUMATIC 180 ANGULAR GRIPPER

PNEUMATIC 180 ANGULAR GRIPPER PNEUMATIC 180 ANGULAR GRIPPER Major Benefits Jaws rotate completely clear of work area eliminating an otherwise required axis of travel Three standard jaw rotations available: 60, 90, and 180 One piece

More information

Optimized for OEM requirements at a lower price.

Optimized for OEM requirements at a lower price. The Price Alternative Optimized for OEM requirements at a lower price. Series OSH Compact Pneumatic Slide Table - 4 s, Incremental Travels Series ORQ Compact Rotary Table - 6 s Series OCV Pneumatic ISO

More information

KRONES DIRECT REPLACEMENTS

KRONES DIRECT REPLACEMENTS PLASTIC PACKAGING COMPONENTS GRO Quality Support Delivery SOLUTIONS A BLOW division MOLDING SOLUTIONS of PHD PLASTIC PACKAGING COMPONENTS P KRONES DIRECT REPLACEMENTS phdinc.com (800) 624-8511 INCREASE

More information

COMPACT CYLINDER CYLINDER FORCE AND WEIGHT TABLE BASE WEIGHT EFFECTIVE AREA

COMPACT CYLINDER CYLINDER FORCE AND WEIGHT TABLE BASE WEIGHT EFFECTIVE AREA CRS COMPACT CYLINDER STROKE TOLERANCE TEMPERATURE LIMITS VELOCITY LIFE EXPECTANCY SERIES CRS 1 psi min to 15 psi max at zero load [.7 bar min to 1 bar max] air.31 inch [.8 mm] -2 to +18 F [-28 to +82 C]

More information

SERIES BCS STRETCH ROD CYLINDERS

SERIES BCS STRETCH ROD CYLINDERS BCS y Q ua lit Support SOLUTIONS for the Plastic Bottle Blowing Industry DIRECT REPLACEMENT FOR SIDEL SERIES AND SERIES MACHINES P U O C PACK TI A S y er iv el D ENTS GR N O G COM P IN G SERIES BCS STRETCH

More information

ADAPTORS, TRANSITION PLATES, AND STANCHIONS

ADAPTORS, TRANSITION PLATES, AND STANCHIONS ADAPTORS, PLATES, AND STANCHIONS FOR EASE OF CONNECTING PHD PRODUCTS TOGETHER, PROVIDING THE MOST VERSATILE SOLUTION IN THE INDUSTRY. need new unit from engineering PLATES ADAPTORS STANCHIONS ADAPTORS,

More information

The Price Alternative Pneumatic Cylinders and Slides

The Price Alternative Pneumatic Cylinders and Slides The Price Alternative Pneumatic Cylinders and Slides OCG Round Body Pneumatic ISO Air The Price Alternative OCQ Round Body Pneumatic ISO Air The Price Alternative OCV ISO Air The Price Alternative SERIES

More information

SERIES SCV SLIDES DESIGN 2/6 INFORMATION SHEET

SERIES SCV SLIDES DESIGN 2/6 INFORMATION SHEET SERIES SC SLIDES DESIGN / INFORMATION SHEET IMPORTANT INFORMATION DO NOT DISCARD! Use this information sheet to assist with slide installation and setup. File with maintenance or machine documentation.

More information

SERIES SFP SLIDES INFORMATION SHEET. Ordering Data. U.S. Patent No. 6,857,780 International Patent No. CA PART NO.

SERIES SFP SLIDES INFORMATION SHEET. Ordering Data. U.S. Patent No. 6,857,780 International Patent No. CA PART NO. Ordering Data SERIES SFP SLIDES INFORMATION SHEET IMPORTANT INFORMATION DO NOT DISCARD! Use this information sheet to assist with slide installation and setup. File with maintenance or machine documentation.

More information

STRETCH ROD CYLINDERS for Krones Stretch Blow Molding Machines

STRETCH ROD CYLINDERS for Krones Stretch Blow Molding Machines PACKAGING COMPONENTS PLASTIC GROUP BCK STRETCH ROD CYLINDERS for Krones Stretch Blow Molding Machines Quality Delivery Support SOLUTIONS A division of PHD Simplified Pneumatic System Easy Maintenance Better

More information

Four Shaft Linear Thrusters

Four Shaft Linear Thrusters Four Shaft Linear Thrusters FOUR SHAFT THRUSTERS Three Models with bores from 2 to 4 Twice the load capacity of comparable two shaft units Reduced deflection and bearing play Compact, light weight robust

More information

SERIES BCZ2D NOZZLE CYLINDER START-UP AND INFORMATION SHEET

SERIES BCZ2D NOZZLE CYLINDER START-UP AND INFORMATION SHEET Model Number Definition SERIES BCZD NOZZLE CYLINDER START-UP AND INFORMATION SHEET IMPORTANT INFORMATION DO NOT DISCARD! Use this information sheet to assist with cylinder installation, setup and repair.

More information

Parallel long travel pneumatic gripper

Parallel long travel pneumatic gripper Parallel long travel pneumatic gripper Major Benefits Compact, low profile design with long jaw travel and large moment capacities Total jaw travels up to 125 mm (4.921 in) allows for larger parts, encapsulated

More information

Bimba Extruded Linear Thrusters 2X FF X EE DP 2X DD 2X Ø DD X EE DP U V W X Y Z R S Dimensions - ET T B 4X TAP AA THRU Ø BB C BORE X CC DP (OPP.SIDE)

Bimba Extruded Linear Thrusters 2X FF X EE DP 2X DD 2X Ø DD X EE DP U V W X Y Z R S Dimensions - ET T B 4X TAP AA THRU Ø BB C BORE X CC DP (OPP.SIDE) Bimba Extruded Linear Thrusters Engineering Specifications Maximum Operating Pressure 140 psi (10 bar) Temperature Range 15 to 160 degrees F (-10 to 70 degrees C) Expected Service Life 1,500 miles (with

More information

Electric Slide Solutions

Electric Slide Solutions Electric Slide Solutions Series ESCV Electric Thruster Slide Designed for vertical or non-rotating applications Built on the field proven Series SCV, the electric version offers many of the same benefits

More information

GRA GRV SERIES GRA PARALLEL GRIPPERS SERIES GRV ANGULAR GRIPPERS. Compact Precision Grippers Ideal for a Wide Range of Applications

GRA GRV SERIES GRA PARALLEL GRIPPERS SERIES GRV ANGULAR GRIPPERS. Compact Precision Grippers Ideal for a Wide Range of Applications GRA GRV SERIES GRA PARALLEL GRIPPERS SERIES GRV ANGULAR GRIPPERS Compact Precision Grippers Ideal for a Wide Range of Applications Series GRA Parallel Series GRV Angular GRAV0 ORDERING DATA: SERIES GRA

More information

DIRECT REPLACEMENTS. phdinc.com (800) INCREASE PRODUCTION REDUCE MAINTENANCE REDUCE DOWNTIME REDUCE SCRAP STRETCHING CYLINDERS

DIRECT REPLACEMENTS. phdinc.com (800) INCREASE PRODUCTION REDUCE MAINTENANCE REDUCE DOWNTIME REDUCE SCRAP STRETCHING CYLINDERS SOLUTIONS A BLOW division MOLDING SOLUTIONS of PHD P Quality SIDEL Support Delivery PLASTIC PACKAGING COMPONENTS P ASTIC PACKAGING COMPONENTS GRO DIRECT REPLACEMENTS phdinc.com (800) 624-8511 INCREASE

More information

Plastic Packaging Solutions

Plastic Packaging Solutions Plastic Packaging Solutions Injection Molding Stretch Blow Molding Extrusion Blow Molding Filling Packaging Increase Production Reduce Maintenance Reduce Downtime Reduce Scrap PPCIB12 Anywhere in the plant,

More information

GRH SERIES GRH PARALLEL GRIPPERS. Long Jaw Travel, Low Profile Gripper with Large Moment Capacities

GRH SERIES GRH PARALLEL GRIPPERS. Long Jaw Travel, Low Profile Gripper with Large Moment Capacities GRH SERIES GRH PARALLEL GRIPPERS Long Jaw Travel, Low Profile Gripper with Large Moment Capacities Wide Jaw Guide System for Minimal Tooling Deflection Million Cycle Life Flexible Mounting Optional Multi-Position

More information

Heavy Duty Bench Top Presses

Heavy Duty Bench Top Presses Heavy Duty Bench Top Presses Model: BTP-501 (FOR SINGLE PISTON ROD, 5 BORE, MF1 MOUNT CYLINDERS) Model: BTP-502 (FOR TRA TRIPLE PISTON ROD, 5 BORE, MF1 MOUNT CYLINDERS) Heavy Duty Bench Top Press shown

More information

Solutions for the Food Industry

Solutions for the Food Industry Solutions for the Food Industry Bakeries, Dairies, Frozen Foods, Poultry, Meat Processing, Packaging, Bottle Blowing Long life replacement actuators to reduce downtime and increase productivity Packaging

More information

Linear Thrusters/PneuMoment

Linear Thrusters/PneuMoment /PneuMoment Extruded TE Series 3.3-3.10 3.11-3.16 T Series Multiple Position T4 Series Movable Housing 3.17-3.22 3.23-3.24 3.25-3.28 3.29-3.32 Pneu-Moment Checklist PneuMoment Pneumatic Actuators PneuMoment

More information

PHD PARTS ORDERS H CODES Dec 2017

PHD PARTS ORDERS H CODES Dec 2017 The H codes are valid only for certain products as listed. Prices for H codes on any product not listed may return an incorrect price! Linear Bottle/Plastic Division Series (B-linear) BCK15, BCK25, BCSU5,

More information

PPC PRODUCTS PARTS LISTS CATALOG 2013

PPC PRODUCTS PARTS LISTS CATALOG 2013 PLASTIC PACKAGING COMPONENTS GROUP PPC PRODUCTS PARTS LISTS CATALOG 0 Quality Delivery Support SOLUTIONS A division of PHD PPCPARTS INDEX Page FACTORY REBUILD PROGRAM Using H Codes... Cylinders STRETCH

More information

PTR Series Pneumatic Rack & Pinion Rotary Actuator

PTR Series Pneumatic Rack & Pinion Rotary Actuator zact14 Pneumatic Rack & Pinion Rotary Actuator Contents Features... 2 Specifications... 3 Dimensions... 4 Mounting Options... 5 Shaft Options... 6 Port Size and Location... 7 Cushions and Bumpers... 8

More information

PARALLEL PNEUMATIC 3-JAW GRIPPER

PARALLEL PNEUMATIC 3-JAW GRIPPER PARALLEL PNEUMATIC 3-JAW GRIPPER Major Benefits 3 jaw design provides self-centerg and maximum contact between part and jaw toolg Low profile to grip force and jaw travel ratios Eight sizes available both

More information

Series OCG Pneumatic Cylinders

Series OCG Pneumatic Cylinders New Models The Price Alternative Series OCG Pneumatic Cylinders www.phdinc.com (8) 624-811 and Rebuildable round body cylinders 6 bore sizes standard stroke lengths High speed/double acting OCG2 ORDERING

More information

ASP Series Steel Body NFPA Cylinder Line

ASP Series Steel Body NFPA Cylinder Line Series Steel Body NFPA Cylinder Line www.numatics.com Table of Contents Series Features and Benefits 3 Standard Mounts 4 How to Order 5 Port Size Availability 6 Dimensions 7-34 Rod Ends 7 Large Bore 8

More information

Linear Thrusters/PneuMoment

Linear Thrusters/PneuMoment /PneuMoment Extruded TE Series (Composite Bearings) 3.3-3.10 3.11-3.16 T Series Multiple Position T4 Series Movable Housing 3.17-3.22 3.23-3.24 3.25-3.28 3.29-3.32 Pneu-Moment Checklist PneuMoment Pneumatic

More information

SERIES PA SWING ARM CLAMPS for the Automotive Industry

SERIES PA SWING ARM CLAMPS for the Automotive Industry Pa SERIES PA SWING ARM CLAMPS for the Automotive Industry Ideal for a wide variety of automated part holding and transfer applications Copper Arm Switches Installed ORDERING DATA: SERIES PA CLAMPS INDEX:

More information

Linear Thrusters/PneuMoment

Linear Thrusters/PneuMoment /PneuMoment Extruded 3.3-3.10 TE Series 3.11-3.16 T Series 3.17-3.22 3.23-3.24 3.25-3.28 3.29-3.32 PneuMoment Pneumatic Actuators PneuMoment Application 3.33 3.34-3.48 3.49 Bimba 304 stainless steel body

More information

Linear Thrusters/PneuMoment

Linear Thrusters/PneuMoment /PneuMoment Extruded 3.3-3.10 TE Series 3.11-3.16 T Series 3.17-3.22 3.23-3.24 3.25-3.28 3.29-3.32 PneuMoment Pneumatic Actuators PneuMoment Application 3.33 3.34-3.48 3.49 Pneu-Moment Bimba Pneu-Moment

More information

Two Shaft Linear Thrusters

Two Shaft Linear Thrusters Two Shaft Linear Thrusters TWO SHAFT THRUSTERS Seven Models with bores from 9/16 to 4 Compact, light weight robust design Smooth linear motion CYLINDER Several manufacturers to choose from Pneumatic or

More information

LOW PROFILE PNEUMATIC PARALLEL GRIPPER

LOW PROFILE PNEUMATIC PARALLEL GRIPPER LOW PROFILE PNEUMATIC PARALLEL GRIPPER Major Benefits Large hardened jaw drivg surfaces Low profile Two jaw travels per size Manifold portg options Four bore sizes with five gripper sizes available both

More information

Actuator Products. Actuator Products Air Cylinders Section B. Actuator Products. Catalog PDN1000-3US Parker Pneumatic

Actuator Products. Actuator Products Air Cylinders Section B. Actuator Products. Catalog PDN1000-3US Parker Pneumatic ir Cylinders Section 1 Pictorial Index Catalog PDN00-3US Tie Rod Cylinders 3M - Economy NFP Cylinder 6 ore sizes 1-1/ through 5 inch 18 standard mounting styles Pressures up to 50 PSIG Temperatures - F

More information

PARALLEL PNEUMATIC HEAVY DUTY GRIPPER

PARALLEL PNEUMATIC HEAVY DUTY GRIPPER PARALLEL PNEUMATIC HEAVY DUTY GRIPPER Major Benefits Compact, low profile design provides high grip force and large moment capacities with low overall weight. Ultra-rigid, wear-compensatg jaw guide system

More information

Series OCG Pneumatic Cylinders

Series OCG Pneumatic Cylinders The Price Alternative Series OCG Pneumatic Cylinders Repairable round body cylinders 6 bore sizes 1 standard stroke lengths High speed/double acting www.phdinc.com (8) 624-811 OCG1 ORDERING DATA DESIGN

More information

FULL COLOR TAB #11 IT AB121

FULL COLOR TAB #11 IT AB121 FULL COLOR TAB #11 IT AB121 208 AB121 Air SERIES: AUTO RECIPROCATING AIR BOOSTER Model Numbers: AB121 & AB221 This 2:1 ratio air-to-air booster is compact and self-contained. Unit incorporates integral

More information

Series HB Solid Brass Cylinders

Series HB Solid Brass Cylinders Series HB Solid Brass Cylinders For General Industrial Use in most nvironments 00 PSI Pneumatic 500 PSI Hydraulic Non shock,, /8,, Bores Magnetic piston available to operate Aurora stainless proximity

More information

Series OCQ Pneumatic Compact Cylinders

Series OCQ Pneumatic Compact Cylinders The Price Alternative Series OCQ Pneumatic Compact Cylinders Ten bore sizes available in incremental stroke lengths Standard shock pads reduce end of travel impact Standard magnets for switch sensing capability

More information

Pneumatic Automation. Air Cylinders. Slides Pg 149. Escapements Pg 150. Grippers - Parallel Pg Angular Pg 152. Rotary Actuators Pg 153

Pneumatic Automation. Air Cylinders. Slides Pg 149. Escapements Pg 150. Grippers - Parallel Pg Angular Pg 152. Rotary Actuators Pg 153 PHD Pneumatic Automation Air Cylinders PHD is a leading manufacturer of electric, pneumatic and hydraulic industrial actuators, designed to help companies across all industries optimise their manufacturing

More information

Series HB Solid Brass Cylinders

Series HB Solid Brass Cylinders Series HB Solid Brass Cylinders or General Industrial Use in most nvironments 00 PSI Pneumatic 500 PSI Hydraulic Non shock,, /8, /, Bores Magnetic piston available to operate Aurora stainless proximity

More information

Rotary Actuators Actuators Three-Position Engineering Specifications/ Application Checklist 4.3-4.15 4.16-4.18 4.19-4.22 Rotary Actuators TURN TO THE BIMBA PNEU-TURN ROTARY ACTUATOR FOR THESE QUALITY FEATURES

More information

QUICK INDEX. Series SMA Aluminum. Pancake and conventional lengths 1 1/8 thru 3 bore. Series SMS Solid Stainless

QUICK INDEX. Series SMA Aluminum. Pancake and conventional lengths 1 1/8 thru 3 bore. Series SMS Solid Stainless QUICK INDEX A U R O R A A I R P R O D U C T S Series SMA Aluminum Pancake and conventional lengths /8 thru 3 bore Series SMS Solid Stainless Pancake and conventional lengths for hostile environments Series

More information

STRAIGHT FITTING ORIFICE DISK MUFFLER MANIFOLD MOUNTING PLATE MULTI-FUNCTION IMPACT SEAL CYLINDER TUBE 1/4 BSPP ELBOW FITTING HEAD ASSEMBLY

STRAIGHT FITTING ORIFICE DISK MUFFLER MANIFOLD MOUNTING PLATE MULTI-FUNCTION IMPACT SEAL CYLINDER TUBE 1/4 BSPP ELBOW FITTING HEAD ASSEMBLY Disassembly OF THE CYLINDER 1) WARNING: All air pressure in the unit must be exhausted prior to disassembly of stretch rod cylinder. 2) Remove valve from manifold (valve not shown). 3) Remove mufflers,

More information

Flat Cylinders Flat-1 Square Flat-1 2.3-2.12 2.13-2.19 Flat Cylinders Flat-II Square Flat-II F02, F03, F04 (multiple power) FOP (multiple position) Flat Accessories Stainless Steel Flat-1 EF1 Cylinders

More information

Maintenance Instructions & Parts List

Maintenance Instructions & Parts List PM-PTR/LTR-C Automation Actuator Division Wadsworth, Ohio 448 October 7, 993 Rev. October 999 PTR/LTR Series Actuators Maintenance Instructions & Parts List Provide Model Number and Serial Number When

More information

Series SS Solid Stainless Cylinders

Series SS Solid Stainless Cylinders Series SS Solid Stainless Cylinders Pneumatic to 200 PSI Hydraulic to 000 PSI Non shock 3/4, /8,, 2 Bore To Help Brighten Your Corner of the World. All exterior components 300 series stainless A U R O

More information

INFORMATION SHEET: SERIES GRT 3 JAW PARALLEL GRIPPERS

INFORMATION SHEET: SERIES GRT 3 JAW PARALLEL GRIPPERS INFORMATION SHEET: SERIES GRT 3 JAW PARALLEL GRIPPERS IMPORTANT INFORMATION DO NOT DISCARD! Use this information sheet to assist with gripper installation and setup. File with maintenance or machine documentation.

More information

Parallel Grippers. Features. Operation. Contents. Mounting

Parallel Grippers. Features. Operation. Contents. Mounting Catalog 9-2/US Features Dowel Pin Holes Slip fit dowels located in gripper body and jaws. Body One piece hard coat anodized aluminum body with Teflon impregnation. Seals Self lubricating dynamic seals

More information

Angular and Parallel Grippers

Angular and Parallel Grippers CAP0551_Grippers_R2.qxp:OEM_TA 2/8/17 2:16 PM Page ii Angular and Parallel Grippers Table of Contents: Grippers Angular Grippers, Parallel Grippers and Options & Accessories Angular Grippers Introduction...

More information

SMA Aluminum Cylinders

SMA Aluminum Cylinders SMA Aluminum Cylinders PNEUMATIC TO 200 PSI HYDRAULIC 250 TO 400 PSI Non shock /8,, 2, 3 BORE SPACE SAVING AND CONVENTIONAL DESIGNS REPAIRABLE Very high quality Pancake type cylinders with all of the engineering

More information

Position Control Hard chrome-plated carbon steel piston rod with blackened threads and wrench flats Sintered bronze rod bushing Internally lubricated

Position Control Hard chrome-plated carbon steel piston rod with blackened threads and wrench flats Sintered bronze rod bushing Internally lubricated Position Control System Products Cylinders 7.3-7.9 Cylinder Rod Lock 7.10-7.11 Cylinder Accessories 7.12-7.15 Pneu-Turn 7.16-7.24 Position Control System 7.25-7.36 Digital Panel Meter 7.37-7.42 Electronic

More information

Service and Parts Manual. Minimum Filtration Required:

Service and Parts Manual. Minimum Filtration Required: R GRESEN Hydraulics Model V0 Sectional Body Directional Control Valve Service and Parts Manual Maximum Operating Pressure: Minimum Filtration Required: 00 PSI ( bar) 0 Micron The information in this Service

More information

Ideal for robotic and end effector applications

Ideal for robotic and end effector applications MINIATURE CLAMPS FOR WORKHOLDING APPLICATIONS Ideal for robotic and end effector applications Bayonet Body Option -B11 ORDERING DATA: SERIES GRM CLAMP SIZE 1 INDEX: Ordering Data Page 2 Benefits Page 3

More information

PERFORMANCE DATA. The lightweight, durable, low-profile ROD CYLINDER SLIDES

PERFORMANCE DATA. The lightweight, durable, low-profile ROD CYLINDER SLIDES The lightweight, durable, low-profile H-Block design is the most versatile of our rod cylinder slides. It also has one of the highest ratings of load weight vs extension for its kind in the industry. The

More information

Series HB Solid Brass Cylinders

Series HB Solid Brass Cylinders Series HB Solid Brass Cylinders or General Industrial Use in most nvironments 00 PSI Pneumatic 500 PSI Hydraulic Non shock,, /8, /, Bores Magnetic piston available to operate Aurora stainless proximity

More information

Air/Oil Tanks Air Boosters Cylinder Options Multi-Stage Triple-Rod Basic Cylinders Accessories Technical Data TRA HOW TO ORDER: SERIES TRA (TRIPLE PIS

Air/Oil Tanks Air Boosters Cylinder Options Multi-Stage Triple-Rod Basic Cylinders Accessories Technical Data TRA HOW TO ORDER: SERIES TRA (TRIPLE PIS SERIES TRA TRIPLE ROD NEW HEAVY-DUTY TRIPLE ROD DESIGN TRD s TR Series has been redesigned. The new series, TRA is a Heavy-Duty version of the TR Series. The new series is a drop-in replacement of the

More information

Ideal for robotic and end effector applications

Ideal for robotic and end effector applications MINIATURE CLAMPS FOR WORKHOLDING APPLICATIONS Ideal for robotic and end effector applications Bayonet Body Option -B11 ORDERING DATA: SERIES GRM CLAMP SIZE 1 INDEX: Ordering Data Page 2 Benefits Page 3

More information

Features and Benefits

Features and Benefits ...........................................................3-14 Features and Benefits..............................................................................3 How To Order....................................................................................4

More information

SMA Aluminum Cylinders

SMA Aluminum Cylinders SMA Aluminum Cylinders PNEUMATIC TO 200 PSI HYDRAULIC 250 TO 400 PSI Non shock /8,, 2, 3 BORE SPACE SAVING AND CONVENTIONAL DESIGNS REPAIRABLE Very high quality Pancake type cylinders with all of the engineering

More information

Linear Thrusters/PneuMoment

Linear Thrusters/PneuMoment /PneuMoment Extruded 3.3-3.10 TE Series (Composite Bearings) 3.11-3.16 T Series (Ball Bearings) 3.17-3.22 Multiple Position 3.23-3.24 NEW T4 Series 3.25-3.28 Checklist 3.29 PneuMomentPneumatic Actuators

More information

LTR Series Light Duty Hydraulic Rack & Pinion Rotary Actuators zhr03

LTR Series Light Duty Hydraulic Rack & Pinion Rotary Actuators zhr03 Light Duty Hydraulic Rack & Pinion Rotary Actuators zhr03 Rack & Pinion Actuators M HTR LTR Contents Features... 2 Ordering Information... 3-4 Specifications... 5 Engineering Data... 6-8 Dimensional Data...

More information

OEM Series Rotary Actuators. Air-Oil Systems, Inc.

OEM Series Rotary Actuators. Air-Oil Systems, Inc. OEM Series Rotary Actuators OEM Series Rotary Actuators: Table of Contents OEM 1-1/4 (OC) Series...pg. 2 How to Order: OEM 1-1/4 (OC) Series...pg. 3 Dimensional Data...pg. 4 OEM 2-1/2 (OT) Series...pg.

More information

Rotary Actuators DRG. See Page3.2 DRF. See. Page3.8 DRM

Rotary Actuators DRG. See Page3.2 DRF. See. Page3.8 DRM Rotary Actuators RR-18/28 Light Duty Rack and Pinion Rotary Actuator Series Designed for small or lightweight Low profile and bearing supported turn table provides an extremely compact package for tight

More information

Product series extended even more! Non-rotating Type. Offers 3 types of non-rotating operation types. push type cylinders. pull type cylinders

Product series extended even more! Non-rotating Type. Offers 3 types of non-rotating operation types. push type cylinders. pull type cylinders The Pen Cylinder s compactness and easy handling make production lines in a broad range of industries. new release with even lighter weight and more PEN CYLINDERS Product series extended even more! The

More information

Keystone F89 pneumatic quarter-turn actuator General purpose / hazardous area

Keystone F89 pneumatic quarter-turn actuator General purpose / hazardous area Compact, reliable and low operation costs for all types of quarter-turn valves are the keywords of the Keystone F89 range of pneumatic actuators Features Direct mounting to all Keystone butterfly valves

More information

KEYSTONE F89 pneumatic quarter-turn actuator GENERAL PURPOSE / HAZARDOUS AREA

KEYSTONE F89 pneumatic quarter-turn actuator GENERAL PURPOSE / HAZARDOUS AREA compact, reliable and low operation costs for all types of quarter-turn valves are the keywords of the Keystone F89 range of pneumatic actuators FEATURES Direct mounting to all Keystone butterfly valves

More information

HEAVY LIFTERS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING

HEAVY LIFTERS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING HEAVY LIFTERS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING Ideal for automated, high load part liftg the automotive and assembly mache builder dustries Available as a drop- replacement M002 Mountg M001 Mountg Switches Stop Collars

More information

Table of Contents General Specifications, Available Mountings... 1 Introduction... 2 Application Examples... 3 Features... 4 Theory of Operation... 5

Table of Contents General Specifications, Available Mountings... 1 Introduction... 2 Application Examples... 3 Features... 4 Theory of Operation... 5 With Continuous Position Feedback Catalog AU08-0971/NA September, 2002! Compact Design! Highly Accurate Position Feedback Capability! Electronic Controllers Available! 5 Bore Sizes Table of Contents General

More information

Parallel Grippers- DPDS DIRECTCONNECT Modular Series

Parallel Grippers- DPDS DIRECTCONNECT Modular Series Courtesy of CMA/Flodyne/Hydradyne Motion Control Hydraulic Pneumatic Electrical Mechanical (8) 426-548 www.cmafh.com 1.134 Parallel Grippers- DPDS DIRECTCONNECT Modular Series Mounting Information: Grippers

More information

PC-Series Precision Linear Actuators. Optimize Your Machine and Save Energy With Reliable, High Performance, Compact Actuators

PC-Series Precision Linear Actuators. Optimize Your Machine and Save Energy With Reliable, High Performance, Compact Actuators PC-Series Precision Linear Actuators Optimize Your Machine and Save Energy With Reliable, High Performance, Compact Actuators Make the Change to Electric Enjoy superior performance and save time and energy

More information

RexMover Series 277 & 297 Rodless Shuttle Cylinder

RexMover Series 277 & 297 Rodless Shuttle Cylinder Industrial Hydraulics Electric Drives and Controls Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies Pneumatics Service Automation Mobile Hydraulics RexMover Series 277 & 297 Rodless Shuttle Cylinder Catalog pages

More information

SERIES PSI OPERATING PRESSURE HEAVY HYDRAULIC DUTY CYLINDER HEAVY DUTY HYDRAULIC CYLINDER PURAKAL CYLINDERS, INC CYLINDERS, INC

SERIES PSI OPERATING PRESSURE HEAVY HYDRAULIC DUTY CYLINDER HEAVY DUTY HYDRAULIC CYLINDER PURAKAL CYLINDERS, INC CYLINDERS, INC CYLINDERS, INC SERIES 2500 3000 PSI ORATING PRESSURE HEAVY DUTY HEAVY HYDRAULIC DUTY CYLINDER HYDRAULIC CYLINDER PURAKAL CYLINDERS, INC PURAKAL P.O. Box 22038 CYLINDERS, INC P.O. Eugene, Box OR 22038 97402-0414

More information

VERTICAL THRUSTER PNEUMATIC SLIDE

VERTICAL THRUSTER PNEUMATIC SLIDE ERTIAL TRUSTER PNEUMATI SLIDE Major Benefits Oversize guide rods Simple design Ideal for non-rotating applications Easy tooling mounting to tool plate bore sizes Units are powered by PD s rugged Series

More information

LP/LPM Series. Non-Lube Air Cylinder P1M. Tooling Plate P1M. Swing Clamp P1M. Contents E51

LP/LPM Series. Non-Lube Air Cylinder P1M. Tooling Plate P1M. Swing Clamp P1M. Contents E51 Non-Lube Air Cylinder P1G C05(S) LP(M) Swing Clamp Tooling Plate Contents Features...52 Ordering Information...53 Specifications...54 Basic Dimensions...55 Mounting Options...56 Spring Data...57 Rod Options...58

More information

grme SERIES GRME ELECTRIC CLAMP Electric Clamp with Greater Flexibility & Durability for the Automotive Industry GRME01A

grme SERIES GRME ELECTRIC CLAMP Electric Clamp with Greater Flexibility & Durability for the Automotive Industry GRME01A grme SERIES GRME ELECTRIC CLAMP for the Automotive Industry Electric Clamp with Greater Flexibility & Durability GRME1A ORDERING DATA: SERIES GRME ELECTRIC CLAMPS INDEX: Ordering Data Pages 2 and 3 Benefits

More information

Ultran Cylinders. Ultran Band Rodless Cylinders. Ultran High Load Slides. Ultran Application Checklist. Ultran High Load Electric Slides

Ultran Cylinders. Ultran Band Rodless Cylinders. Ultran High Load Slides. Ultran Application Checklist. Ultran High Load Electric Slides 5.3-5.4 5.5-5.12 5.13-5.23 5.24-5.32 Ultran Band Rodless 5.33-5.43 Ultran Application Checklist 5.44 Electric 5.45-5.53 Ultran Ultran Bimba Ultran SPACE SAVINGS OF ALMOST 50% IN MOST MODELS Two Models:

More information

PNEUMATIC ROTARY ACTUATORS

PNEUMATIC ROTARY ACTUATORS Bulletin FRA.C-09 Prices effective September 1, 2011 PNEUMATIC ROTARY ACTUATORS FRA & FRC Series FRA Series Features 1. Magnetic pistons are standard on all models. 2. Compact design saves space. 3. Rectangular

More information

Turn-Dex Rotary Vane Actuators

Turn-Dex Rotary Vane Actuators Turn-Dex Rotary Vane Actuators Turn-Dex: Table of Contents Turn-Dex Turn-Dex 1-1/4 Bore pg. 2 How to Order pg. Dimensional Data pg. 4 Turn-Dex 2-1/2 Bore pg. 5 How to Order pg. 6 Dimensional Data pg. 7

More information

GRIPPERS AIR OR HYDRAULIC ANGULAR OR PARALLEL MOTION

GRIPPERS AIR OR HYDRAULIC ANGULAR OR PARALLEL MOTION GRIPPERS AIR OR HYDRAULIC ANGULAR OR PARALLEL MOTION A Wide Range of Sizes, Jaw Styles, Jaw Travels, and Grippg Forces for Most Any Grippg Requirement INDEX: Parallel Jaw Motion Pages -1 to -19 18 Angular

More information

Gripper Selection Guide

Gripper Selection Guide Gripper Selection Guide The Right Gripper for Your Part Robotic end effector solutions Angular & parallel, many sizes & options available For handling body panels & various sized parts Superior design

More information

AB121Booster ITSeriesIntensifiers. Reservoirs&Tanks. ITSeries Page190

AB121Booster ITSeriesIntensifiers. Reservoirs&Tanks. ITSeries Page190 AB121 ITSeries Reservoirsand AB121 Page188 ITSeries Page190 Reservoirs& Page192 95% OFOURCYLINDERSSHIPIN2-3DAYS! ONEDAYRUSHSERVICEAVAILABLEONALLCATALOGEDCYLINDERMODELS! AB121 Air SERIES: AUTO RECIPROCATING

More information

FKHS Series. 3 Jaw Parallel Motion Pneumatic Grippers. Mounting Hole. Sensor Capable. Bottom tapped holes. Dowel Hole & Slot

FKHS Series. 3 Jaw Parallel Motion Pneumatic Grippers. Mounting Hole. Sensor Capable. Bottom tapped holes. Dowel Hole & Slot Catalog No. KHS- KHS Series Jaw Parallel Motion Pneumatic Grippers Mounting Hole Can be mounted from the gripper side Mounting slot for easy sensor installation Sensor Capable Bottom tapped holes Can be

More information

SMA Aluminum Cylinders

SMA Aluminum Cylinders SMA Aluminum Cylinders PNEUMATIC TO 200 PSI HYDRAULIC 250 TO 400 PSI Non shock 1 1/8, 1, 2, 3 BORE SPACE SAVING AND CONVENTIONAL DESIGNS REPAIRABLE Very high quality Pancake type cylinders with all of

More information

MXP BAND CYLINDER MAXIMUM DURABILITY N INTERNAL BEARING S SOLID BEARING P PROFILED RAIL ENGR PB CC MG LS BC4 BC3 BC2 MXP ABT.

MXP BAND CYLINDER MAXIMUM DURABILITY N INTERNAL BEARING S SOLID BEARING P PROFILED RAIL ENGR PB CC MG LS BC4 BC3 BC2 MXP ABT. www.tolomatic.com MXP BAND CYLINDER N INTERNAL BEARING S SOLID BEARING P PROFILED RAIL CONTENTS N Internal Bearing Features... MXP_2 S Solid Bearing Features... MXP_4 P Profiled Rail Features... MXP_6

More information

SERIES RTC RODLESS CYLINDERS PNEUMATIC SHUTTLE TYPE

SERIES RTC RODLESS CYLINDERS PNEUMATIC SHUTTLE TYPE SERIES RTC RODLESS CYLINDERS PNEUMATIC SHUTTLE TYPE Series RTC Rodless Cylinder Pneumatic automation building block Series RTC (Rodless Thrust Cylinder)-High performance shuttle type rodless cylinders

More information

INFORMATION SHEET: SERIES SxL/SxH DESIGN 1 [5] SLIDES

INFORMATION SHEET: SERIES SxL/SxH DESIGN 1 [5] SLIDES INFORMATION SHEET: SERIES SxL/SxH DESIGN [] SLIDES IMPORTANT INFORMATION DO NOT DISCARD! Use this information sheet to assist with slide installation and setup. File with maintenance or machine documentation.

More information

Actuated Valves PRICING

Actuated Valves PRICING Electric & Pneumatic Actuated Valves Actuated Valves PRICING Page Suitable for Oil-Free air handling to 5 psi, not for distribution of compressed air or gas Spears Manufacturing Company Due to Material

More information

Turn-Dex (CD) 1-1/4 Series

Turn-Dex (CD) 1-1/4 Series rotarybp-qx4-ta 4/1/05 11:7 AM Page 2 Turn-Dex (CD) 1-1/4 Series ROTARY VANE ACTUATORS with integral unidirectional clutch: 6 base models with torque outputs from 1 in.lbs. to 60 in.lbs. Clockwise or Counterclockwise

More information

KNOCK CYLINDERS CONTENTS ACTUATORS GENERAL CATALOG. Caution KNOCK CYLINDERS

KNOCK CYLINDERS CONTENTS ACTUATORS GENERAL CATALOG. Caution KNOCK CYLINDERS CAD drawing data catalog is available. ACTUATORS GENERAL CATALOG CONTENTS Features/Introductions of Variations 79 Double Acting Type Specifications 81 Order s 82 Inner Construction and Major Parts 83 Dimensions

More information

The friction free alternative

The friction free alternative Rolling The Rolling Diaphragm Air Cylinder The advent of the long stroke rolling diaphragm as a means of low-friction dynamic sealing has led to the development of the ControlAir Diaphragm Air Cylinder.

More information

DURA-TRANS NB-SERIES. Bi-Directional Transfer NB-10 NB-20 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OPERATING PRINCIPLES 6-1.1

DURA-TRANS NB-SERIES. Bi-Directional Transfer NB-10 NB-20 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OPERATING PRINCIPLES 6-1.1 NB-SERIES NB Series of Bidirectional Transfer Devices, commonly known as tuckers, provide a practical low-cost method for automatic work positioning. The units are extremely compact and eliminate the need

More information

Parallel Grippers- DPW DIRECTCONNECT Wide Body Series

Parallel Grippers- DPW DIRECTCONNECT Wide Body Series DPW SERIES 1.196 Parallel Grippers- DPW DIRECTCONNECT Wide Body Series DIRECTCONNECT Connectivity: DIRECTCONNECT Tapped and Dowel mounting on body. Large or Wide Parts: Wide body design provides secure

More information

Copyright 2017, by PHD, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

Copyright 2017, by PHD, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in the U.S.A. The Right Gripper for Your Part GRIPPER SELECTION GUIDE - Robotic end effector solutions - Angular and parallel, many sizes and options available - For handling various sized parts - Superior design and

More information

Vickers. Vane Pumps. Double Thru-drive Vane Pumps. High speed, high pressure VQT Series for mobile equipment. Released 7/93

Vickers. Vane Pumps. Double Thru-drive Vane Pumps. High speed, high pressure VQT Series for mobile equipment. Released 7/93 Vickers Vane Pumps Double Thru-drive Vane Pumps High speed, high pressure VQT Series for mobile equipment Released 7/93 612 Introduction Double VQT high performance pumps are fixed displacement units that

More information

BETTIS SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY FOR CB-SR-S SEISMIC SPRING RETURN SERIES PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS

BETTIS SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY FOR CB-SR-S SEISMIC SPRING RETURN SERIES PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS BETTIS SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY FOR CB-SR-S SEISMIC SPRING RETURN SERIES PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS PART NUMBER: 102264 REVISION: "C" DATE: November 2000 Page 1 of 11 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1.1

More information

Keystone F89C Pneumatic Quarter-Turn Actuator Chemical Industry / Hazardous area

Keystone F89C Pneumatic Quarter-Turn Actuator Chemical Industry / Hazardous area The F89C addresses the specific requirements for automated quarter-turn valves in the chemical industry on top of the reliability and low maintenance cost offered Features Valve connection compatible with

More information

Global Series Air Cylinders

Global Series Air Cylinders Global Series Air Cylinders Double Rod Options and Toolplates with interchange hole patterns for GT Series 2x øsp C bores opposite side for P SHCS KP EP KP 4x, GP threads (See pages 40-43) Global Series

More information